Simrad | ER60 - REV B | Technical information | Simrad ER60 - REV B Technical information

Reference manual
Simrad EK60
Scientific echo sounder
www.simrad.com
TECHNOLOGY
FOR
SUSTAINABLE
FISHERIES
Simrad EK60
Reference Manual
Release 2.4.X
This reference manual describes how to use the Simrad
EK60 and EY60 scientific echo sounders. The software
application used to operate and control the EK60 and EY60
systems is referred to as Simrad ER60.
164692/D
23.02.2012
©
Kongsberg Maritime AS
Revision status
Document number: 164692 /Revision D / ISBN-13: 978-8066-011-4
Rev.A
July 2003
First version.
Rev.B
September 2004
Revised for software version 2.1.0.
Rev.C
January 2008
Revised for software version 2.2.0. Document transferred to XML
format.
Rev.D
February 2012
Revised for software version 2.4.x. The product name changed from
ER60 to EK60.
Copyright
©2012 Kongsberg Maritime AS
The information contained in this document remains the sole property of Kongsberg Maritime AS. No part
of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means, and the information contained
within it is not to be communicated to a third party, without the prior written consent of Kongsberg
Maritime AS. The document, or any part of it, may not be translated to any other language without the
written approval from Kongsberg Maritime AS.
Disclaimer
Kongsberg Maritime AS endeavours to ensure that all information in this document is correct and fairly
stated, but does not accept liability for any errors or omissions.
Warning
The equipment to which this manual applies must only be used for the purpose for which it was
designed. Improper use or maintenance may cause damage to the equipment and/or injury
to personnel. All users must be familiar with the contents of the appropriate manuals before
attempting to install, operate, maintain or in any other way work on the equipment.
Kongsberg Maritime AS disclaims any responsibility for damage or injury caused by improper
installation, use or maintenance of the equipment.
Support information
If you require maintenance or repair, contact your local dealer. You can also contact us using the
following address: simrad.support@simrad.com. If you need information about our other products, visit
http://www.simrad.com. On this website you will also find a list of our dealers and distributors.
See also Support information on page 16.
Kongsberg Maritime AS
www.kongsberg.com
Reference Manual
Table of contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL ....................................................... 9
SIMRAD EK60 ................................................................. 11
Important ................................................................................................................12
When the EK60 is not used.......................................................................... 12
When you are docking your vessel ............................................................... 12
If something breaks down............................................................................ 12
When you switch off the EK60 .................................................................... 12
Transducer handling.................................................................................... 13
System description .................................................................................................13
System diagram ......................................................................................................14
Network security ....................................................................................................15
Support information ...............................................................................................16
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES .......................................... 18
Power on/off procedures.........................................................................................19
Powering up the EK60 ................................................................................ 19
Powering off the EK60................................................................................ 20
Echogram procedures .............................................................................................21
Changing the echogram settings................................................................... 21
Changing the range ..................................................................................... 21
Changing the pulse duration to enhance the vertical resolution....................... 22
Defining minimum and maximum depth....................................................... 22
Investigating low ping rate .......................................................................... 23
Transceiver installation procedures ........................................................................25
Installing a frequency channel ..................................................................... 25
Disconnecting a frequency channel .............................................................. 26
Changing the IP address .............................................................................. 26
Data recording and playback procedures ...............................................................28
Recording raw data ..................................................................................... 28
Play back raw data ...................................................................................... 29
Noise measurements at sea.....................................................................................30
Basic guidelines.......................................................................................... 30
Noise measurement procedure ..................................................................... 31
Test results ................................................................................................. 33
Evaluation .................................................................................................. 33
Multiplexer setup....................................................................................................34
Connecting the multiplexer.......................................................................... 34
Setting up the transceiver ............................................................................ 34
Technical information ................................................................................. 35
164692/D
3
Simrad EK60
EK60 CALIBRATION ........................................................ 36
Basic information about calibration .......................................................................37
Transducer maintenance .........................................................................................37
Calibration procedures ...........................................................................................38
Check installation ....................................................................................... 38
Anchoring .................................................................................................. 40
Winches ..................................................................................................... 41
Attaching the sphere ................................................................................... 42
Lowering the sphere.................................................................................... 43
Reference target.......................................................................................... 43
Calibration ................................................................................................. 44
Views......................................................................................................... 46
Data editing................................................................................................ 48
Updating transducer parameters ................................................................... 49
Previously recorded data ............................................................................. 49
Offline calibration ....................................................................................... 49
DISPLAY VIEWS.............................................................. 50
Display organization...............................................................................................51
Main menu..............................................................................................................52
Toolbars ..................................................................................................................52
Status Bar ...............................................................................................................53
Channel windows ...................................................................................................54
Depth view................................................................................................. 55
Single target position view .......................................................................... 56
Single target histogram view........................................................................ 57
Echogram view........................................................................................... 58
Scope view................................................................................................. 59
Colour scale view ....................................................................................... 60
Numerical view .......................................................................................... 61
THE MENU SYSTEM ......................................................... 62
Operation menu ......................................................................................................63
View menu..............................................................................................................64
Options menu .........................................................................................................64
Install menu ............................................................................................................65
Output menu ...........................................................................................................66
Window menu.........................................................................................................67
Help menu ..............................................................................................................67
Shortcut menus .......................................................................................................68
Depth short-cut menu.................................................................................. 68
Single Target Position short-cut menu .......................................................... 69
Single Target Histogram short-cut menu....................................................... 69
4
164692/D
Reference Manual
Echogram short-cut menu............................................................................ 70
Scope short-cut menu.................................................................................. 71
Colour Scale short-cut menu........................................................................ 72
Numerical short-cut menu ........................................................................... 73
FUNCTIONS AND DIALOGS ............................................. 74
Operation menu; functions and dialogs..................................................................75
Normal Operation ....................................................................................... 76
Replay ....................................................................................................... 78
Ping Control ............................................................................................... 80
Data Source................................................................................................ 82
Log In ........................................................................................................ 84
Log Out ..................................................................................................... 85
Exit............................................................................................................ 85
View menu; functions and dialogs .........................................................................86
Toolbars ..................................................................................................... 86
Status Bar................................................................................................... 87
Options menu; functions and dialogs .....................................................................89
Colours ...................................................................................................... 89
Tooltip ....................................................................................................... 91
Calculation Interval..................................................................................... 91
Local Time ................................................................................................. 92
Load Settings.............................................................................................. 93
Save Settings .............................................................................................. 94
Install menu; functions and dialogs........................................................................95
Transceiver Installation ............................................................................... 96
Navigation ............................................................................................... 101
Motion ..................................................................................................... 107
Trawl ....................................................................................................... 109
Environment............................................................................................. 110
Annotation ............................................................................................... 112
Remoting ................................................................................................. 113
Users and Passwords................................................................................. 117
Port Management...................................................................................... 118
Output menu; functions and dialogs.....................................................................123
File Output ............................................................................................... 123
Ethernet Output ........................................................................................ 127
Depth Output............................................................................................ 128
Window menu; functions and dialogs ..................................................................132
New Channel............................................................................................ 132
Cascade.................................................................................................... 133
Tile .......................................................................................................... 134
Open All .................................................................................................. 134
164692/D
5
Simrad EK60
Close All.................................................................................................. 135
Help menu; functions and dialogs ........................................................................136
Contents................................................................................................... 136
About....................................................................................................... 136
Short-cut menus; functions and dialogs ...............................................................138
Bottom Detection...................................................................................... 140
Single Target Detection ............................................................................. 141
Colour Scale............................................................................................. 143
Histogram ................................................................................................ 144
Echogram................................................................................................. 144
Horizontal Axis ........................................................................................ 148
Bottom Range........................................................................................... 149
Surface Range .......................................................................................... 151
New Layer ............................................................................................... 152
Layer Properties ....................................................................................... 154
Delete Layer............................................................................................. 155
Numerical View........................................................................................ 156
Print......................................................................................................... 156
Print Preview............................................................................................ 157
Configure Window.................................................................................... 158
Hide View ................................................................................................ 158
Secondary functions and dialogs ..........................................................................159
Add User Account .................................................................................... 160
User Properties ......................................................................................... 160
Configure Statusbar................................................................................... 161
EK500 Datagram ...................................................................................... 162
Errors....................................................................................................... 164
Warnings.................................................................................................. 165
HAC Datagram......................................................................................... 166
LAN Port Setup ........................................................................................ 168
Serial Port Setup ....................................................................................... 169
Port Monitor............................................................................................. 170
Transducer Parameters .............................................................................. 172
Analog Motion Sensor Setup ..................................................................... 172
TELEGRAM FORMATS .................................................... 174
About the NMEA telegram format.......................................................................174
National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA)...................................... 175
NMEA telegram principles ........................................................................ 175
Standard NMEA 0183 communication parameters ...................................... 175
NMEA sentence structure.......................................................................... 176
Specification of NMEA telegrams .......................................................................177
DBS Depth below surface ......................................................................... 177
6
164692/D
Reference Manual
DBT Depth below transducer..................................................................... 178
DPT Depth ............................................................................................... 178
GGA Global positioning system fix data..................................................... 179
GLL Geographical position latitude/longitude ............................................ 179
HDG Heading, deviation and variation....................................................... 180
HDM Heading, magnetic........................................................................... 181
HDT Heading, true ................................................................................... 181
RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data .................................... 181
VBW Dual ground and water speed ........................................................... 182
VHW Water speed and heading ................................................................. 183
VLW Dual ground/water distance .............................................................. 183
VTG Course over ground & ground speed .................................................. 183
Proprietary telegrams and formats .......................................................................185
Simrad EK500 Depth telegram .................................................................. 185
Kongsberg EM Attitude 1000 .................................................................... 186
Kongsberg EM Attitude 3000 .................................................................... 187
DBS Depth of trawl below surface ............................................................. 188
HFB Trawl headrope to footrope and bottom .............................................. 188
PSIMP-D PI Sensor data ........................................................................... 188
PSIMDHB Bottom hardness and biomass................................................... 190
Simrad Sounder/TSS1 Motion protocol ...................................................... 190
Simrad ATS Annotation ............................................................................ 192
Proprietary third party telegrams and formats......................................................193
Atlas depth telegram ................................................................................. 193
Furuno GPhve heave telegram ................................................................... 193
FILE FORMATS .............................................................. 194
Numeric type definition........................................................................................194
Raw data format ...................................................................................................194
Data encapsulation.................................................................................... 195
Configuration datagram............................................................................. 196
NMEA datagram ...................................................................................... 197
Annotation datagram ................................................................................ 198
Sample datagram ...................................................................................... 198
DATA SUBSCRIPTION AND REMOTE CONTROL .............. 200
Data subscription communication ........................................................................200
Data subscriptions overview ...................................................................... 201
Request server information ........................................................................ 201
Connecting to server ................................................................................. 202
Keep connection alive ............................................................................... 203
Issue commands on the server.................................................................... 204
Collecting data ......................................................................................... 206
Parameter management ............................................................................. 209
164692/D
7
Simrad EK60
Disconnecting from server......................................................................... 211
Data subscription types ........................................................................................ 211
Bottom detection ...................................................................................... 212
Target strength (TS) detection.................................................................... 212
Sample data.............................................................................................. 213
Echogram................................................................................................. 214
Targets echogram...................................................................................... 215
Integration................................................................................................ 216
Targets integration .................................................................................... 217
Parameter descriptions .........................................................................................218
ECHO SOUNDER THEORY............................................... 222
Concepts ...............................................................................................................223
Observation range..................................................................................... 223
Split-beam operation ................................................................................. 224
Bottom echo ............................................................................................. 225
Wave propagation ..................................................................................... 225
Biomass ................................................................................................... 226
Dynamic range and display presentation..................................................... 227
Bottom slopes........................................................................................... 227
Parameters ............................................................................................................230
TVG gain ................................................................................................. 230
Output power............................................................................................ 231
Pulse duration........................................................................................... 233
Range selection ........................................................................................ 235
INSTALLATION ............................................................. 237
Installation of the system units .............................................................................237
Upgrading the EK60 software ..............................................................................238
Installation of the EK60 software.........................................................................238
Setting up the EK60 transceiver(s) for the first time............................................239
Main procedure ........................................................................................ 239
Installing frequency channels..................................................................... 241
Starting normal operation .......................................................................... 241
8
164692/D
About this manual
About this manual
Purpose
The purpose of this reference manual is to provide the descriptions, procedures and
detailed parameter explanations required to allow for safe and efficient use of the Simrad
EK60, as well as a thorough understanding of the system parameters and adjustments.
A good understanding of system functions and controls is essential to fully take
advantage of the functionality provided. Sea conditions vary, sometimes drastically,
and it is not possible to identify settings that will provide the best data at all times.
Careful study of the information in this manual is highly recommended, preferably
while exploring the system’s functionality.
Target audience
The manual is intended for all users of the Simrad EK60. Due to the nature of the
descriptions and the level of detail provided by this manual, it is well suited for those
who are – or wish to be – expert users.
We assume that you are familiar with the basic acoustic principles of sound in water, and
that you have some experience with echo sounder operation.
Click “Help”!
Installed on your Simrad EK60 you will find a comprehensive on-line help system.
You may not find it in your language, but everything you can read in the Simrad EK60
Reference manual can also be found in the context sensitive on-line help.
To access this information click Help on the Main menu, or the Help button in one of
the dialogs.
Note that when you open the help system it will place itself on the top of the display
presentation!
Online information
All documentation provided for your Simrad EK60 can be downloaded from
http://www.simrad.com.
Software version
This manual complies to software version 2.4.X.
164692/D
9
Simrad EK60
Registered trademarks
Windows®, Windows® XP®, and Windows® 7 are either registered trademarks, or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Simrad®, SIMRAD® and the Simrad® logo are either registered trademarks, or
trademarks of Kongsberg Maritime AS in Norway and other countries.
10
164692/D
Simrad EK60
Simrad EK60
Study this chapter to familiarize yourself with the Simrad EK60.
The operation software provided for the Simrad EK60 is identified as Simrad ER60. This
manual describes both the EK60 echo sounder system as well as the ER60 software.
Topics
• Important on page 12
• System description on page 13
• System diagram on page 14
• Network security on page 15
• Support information on page 16
164692/D
11
Simrad EK60
Important
As with all other advanced instruments, there are a few important things that you must be
aware of.
Topics
• When the EK60 is not used on page 12
• When you are docking your vessel on page 12
• If something breaks down on page 12
• When you switch off the EK60 on page 12
• Transducer handling on page 13
When the EK60 is not used
When you do not use the EK60, switch off the display and the computer.
If you know that you will not use the EK60 for a long time, we recommend that you also
switch off the transceiver(s). Since each transceiver is not provided with a power switch,
you must either disconnect the power cable, or disengage the relevant circuit breaker.
When you are docking your vessel
If the transducer is activated when out of water it may be damaged beyond repair. It is
therefore very important that no one tries to use the EK60 when the vessel is in dry dock.
To ensure that this can not happen, disconnect the power supply cable to the either the
computer or the transceiver - or both! You may also remove the circuit breakers on the
AC mains supply to the EK60 transceiver(s). Do this before the vessel is placed in
the dry dock!
If something breaks down
If you believe that something has broken down, contact your local dealer. He will be
able to assist.
A list of all our dealers is provided on http://www.simrad.com. If you are unable to
contact a dealer, observe the support information in this chapter.
→ Support information on page 16
When you switch off the EK60
You must NEVER switch off the EK60 by means of the on/off switch on the computer.
You must ALWAYS exit the EK60 application by clicking Exit on the File menu.
If you power down the EK60 by means of the computer switch you may damage the
software application and the interface parameters to external devices.
12
164692/D
Simrad EK60
Transducer handling
Note
All transducers must be handled as delicate items. Any wrongful handling may damage
the transducer beyond repair.
Do not activate the transducer when it is out of the water.
Do not lift the transducer by the cable.
Do not step on the transducer cable.
Do not handle the transducer roughly, avoid impacts.
Do not expose the transducer to direct sunlight or excessive heat.
Do not use high pressure water, sand blasting or metal tools to clean the transducer face.
Do not use strong solvents to clean the transducer face.
System description
The Simrad EK60 is the most modern scientific echo sounder in the market. Based on
more than 60 years of research and development in close collaboration with leading
marine scientists this echo sounder system has become an international standard for fish
stock assessment.
• High dynamic range
• Raw data recording
• Low self noise
• High ping rate
• Multi frequency application for species identification
• Simultaneous transmission of all frequencies
• Several frequencies covering same sampling volume
• Remote control
• Store and reload personal settings
• Data server interface for raw data recording
The Simrad EK60 can operate seven echo sounder frequencies simultaneously ranging
from 18 to 710 kHz. A wide selection of high quality accurate transducers is available.
The Simrad EK60 is a split-beam Windows(TM) operated echo sounder with built-in
calibration. It is specifically suited for permanent installation onboard a research vessel.
It is still compact and a natural choice for portable use. The portable version Simrad
EY60 is provided in a rugged case.
The Simrad EK60 is modular, and you can assemble any combinations of transceivers
and transducers to fit your research purposes. In a typical configuration, the Simrad
EK60 will comprise:
164692/D
13
Simrad EK60
• One colour display
• One Processor Unit (personal computer)
• An Ethernet switch
• One or more transceiver units
• One or more transducers
Real time echo integration and target strength analysis in an unlimited number of layers
is provided as well as storage of raw data for replay or analysis in one of several
post-processing software packages. Several post-processing alternatives are available
for rapid survey analysis and reporting.
System diagram
A typical EK60 system diagram with three transceivers is provided. Interface
capabilities, power supplies and power cables are not shown.
Figure 1
Typical system diagram with a number of transceivers
SIMRAD
MENU
PWR
SIMRAD EK60
Transducer
TX
RX
Ethernet
S1
S2
Fuse 10A
115-230 V AC
Fuse 2A
DSP-6X
Transceiver
IO
Transducer
TX
RX
POWER
+5V
+12V
-12V
HV1
HV2
12 VDC
General Purpose
Ethernet
POWER
+5V
+12V
-12V
HV1
HV2
Auxiliary
IO
Fuse 10A
115-230 V AC
Fuse 2A
Ethernet
Fuse 10A
115-230 V AC
Fuse 2A
Ethernet
TX
RX
DSP-6X
Transceiver
12 VDC
Auxiliary
Transducer
General Purpose
Ethernet
POWER
+5V
+12V
-12V
HV1
HV2
Auxiliary
IO
12 VDC
DSP-6X
Transceiver
Ethernet
General Purpose
S1
S2
S1
S2
(CD010200-015)
A
Display Unit
B
Processor Unit (personal computer)
C
Ethernet switch
D
Transceiver Unit
E
Transducers
14
164692/D
Simrad EK60
The basic Simrad EK60 scientific echo sounder system consists of one transducer, one
transceiver unit and one processor unit (computer). In addition to this, the system is
provided with echo sounder and post-processing software.
The complete Simrad EK60 system comprises:
• Simrad EK60 hardware
• Simrad ER60 scientific echo sounder application
• Simrad BI60 post-processing software (no longer supported)
Additional post-processing software applications may be provided from third party
suppliers.
In a Simrad EY60 system, the display (A) and computer (B) are replaced with a powerful
laptop computer.
Network security
Equipment manufactured by Simrad are frequently connected to the ship's local area
network. Connecting any personal computer to a network will always expose the data
on that computer to all other computers connected to the network. Several threats may
immediately occur:
• Remote computers can read the data.
• Remote computers can change the data.
• Remote computers can change the behaviour of the computer, for example by
installing unwanted software.
Usually, two parameters are used to define the threat level:
• The likelihood that any remote connection will do any of the above.
• The damage done if a remote connection succeeds doing this.
Because Simrad has no information regarding the complete system installation on any
vessel, we can not estimate the threat level and the need for network security. For this
reason, we can not accept responsibility for network security. Systems provided by
Simrad are regarded as stand-alone systems, even though they may be connected to
a network for sensor interfaces and/or data distribution. For this reason, no safety
applications are installed on any computers to protect these against viruses, malware
or unintentional access by external users.
Securing the EK60 itself has no meaning unless there is a policy in place that secures
all computers in the network, including physical access by trained and trusted users.
This must always be a task for the end user to implement. The EK60 system has been
verified to run under rather strict security setup, so it should be possible to implement
a good security regime.
164692/D
15
Simrad EK60
If you wish to connect the EK60 to the ship's network, you must implement the same
security mechanisms on the EK60 computer(s) as for the rest of the network. In the
tentative standard from Det Norske Veritas (DNV) - Integrated Software Dependent
System (DNV-OS-D203) – this is described as a task for the network responsible person in
charge of the overall behaviour of the network system. Some key elements here must be:
• The same anti-virus protection on all computers, including routines for updating
this protection.
• The same settings for the firewall on all computers.
• Controlled physical access to computers on the network.
• Trusted operators.
• Log-in access mechanisms
• Same policy for attaching peripheral equipment to the computers (USB devices,
hard drives etc)
• Installation of programs on any computer in the network, verification that each
program is authentic.
• Definition of which programs are allowed to run on each computer.
• Logging mechanism of computer activity, and inspection of these logs.
How to define and implement these rules depends on each end user's network system
configuration, which again must be a result of the policies and threat levels the end user
has defined for the complete installation. For some products the network consists of only
processor units or work stations, transceivers and a few sensors. On other vessels, larger
computer systems can be installed to include numerous products and data systems. As
the DNV-OS-D203 suggests, there must be one responsible person for the security of
a system, large or small.
Support information
If you need technical support for your Simrad EK60 you must contact your local
dealer, or one of our support departments. A list of all our dealers is provided on
http://www.simrad.com.
Norway (Main office)
• Company name: Kongsberg Maritime AS / Simrad
• Address: Strandpromenaden 50, 3190 Horten, Norway
• Telephone: +47 33 03 40 00
• Telefax: +47 33 04 29 87
• E-mail address: simrad.support@simrad.com
• Website: http://www.simrad.no
16
164692/D
Simrad EK60
Spain
• Company name: Simrad Spain
• Address: Poligono Partida Torres 38, 03570 Villajoyosa, Spain
• Telephone: +34 966 810 149
• Telefax: +34 966 852 304
• E-mail address: simrad.spain@simrad.com
• Website: http://www.simrad.es
USA
• Company name: Kongsberg Underwater Technology Inc / Simrad Fisheries
• Address: 19210 33rd Ave W, Lynnwood, WA 98036, USA
• Telephone: +1 425 712 1136
• Telefax: +1 425 712 1193
• E-mail address: simrad.usa@simrad.com
• Website: http://www.simrad.com
Malaysia
• Company name: Kongsberg Maritime Malaysia Sdn. Bhd
• Address: Unit 27-5 Signature Offices, The Boulevard, Mid Valley City, Lingkaran
Syed Putra, 59200 Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia
• Telephone: +65 6411 7488
• Telefax: +60 3 2201 3359
• E-mail address: simrad.asia@simrad.com
• Website: http://www.simrad.com
164692/D
17
Simrad EK60
Operational procedures
This chapter contains several operational procedures explaining how you can put your
Simrad EK60 to use.
Are there any procedures missing? Are you performing an operation that we have not
explained? Write an e-mail to simrad.support@simrad.com and let us know. We may
then include the procedure in the next version of this manual.
Topics
• Power on/off procedures on page 19
• Echogram procedures on page 21
• Transceiver installation procedures on page 25
• Data recording and playback procedures on page 28
• Noise measurements at sea on page 30
• Multiplexer setup on page 34
18
164692/D
Operational procedures
Power on/off procedures
These procedures explain how to switch the EK60 system on and off.
Note
When you power up the EK60 for the very first time, observe the procedures in chapter
Installation on page 237.
Make sure that you have sufficient water below the hull before you power up the EK60. If
you start the EK60 with the transducer in air, you may damage it beyond repair!
Important
In this manual, the phrase “click” means that you shall place the cursor over the specified
button, field or function, and press the left mouse (or trackball) button once. The phrase
“double-click” means that you shall click the mouse button twice rapidly.
The phrase “press” means that you shall press a physical button with your finger, for
example a character button or the Enter key on the keyboard.
Topics
• Powering up the EK60 on page 19
• Powering off the EK60 on page 20
Related topics
• Log In on page 84
• Exit on page 85
• Transceiver Installation on page 96
• Normal Operation on page 76
• New Channel on page 132
Powering up the EK60
This procedure explains how to power up the Simrad EK60.
Procedure
1 Verify that the transceiver(s) are switched on.
The General Purpose Transceiver (GPT) is not provided with an on/off switch.
Unless a dedicated solution has been provided during the installation to facilitate
power on/off, the transceiver(s) are permanently powered up. However, if the EK60
has not been used for a longer period of time, the power to the transceiver(s) may
have been disconnected.
2 Power up the colour display.
If required, refer to the instructions provided by the display manufacturer.
3 Power up the EK60 computer.
Wait for the operating system to start up.
164692/D
19
Simrad EK60
4
Double-click the EK60 icon on the desktop to start the program.
5
Wait while the EK60 program starts on the computer.
6
Observe that the EK60 presentation fills the entire screen.
7
If the Login dialog appears, enter user name and password.
8
Once the echo sounder is running, start pinging by pressing the Start button on
the toolbar.
9
Observe that the EK60 starts.
The EK60 starts up using the same operational parameters as the last time you used
it. If these parameters are acceptable, continue operation. If you wish to alter basic
operational parameters, see the dedicated procedures.
When the EK60 starts, it is very important that it detects the bottom correctly. In
most cases this will take place automatically. However, we have experienced that
large schools of fish or difficult bottom conditions have deceived the EK60 to display
the wrong depth. In these cases the sounder may display the bottom at 0,0 meters. In
order to aid the EK60 to locate the correct depth, observe the dedicated procedure.
Related topics
• Log In on page 84
• Normal Operation on page 76
Powering off the EK60
This procedure explains how to power off the Simrad EK60.
Note
You must never switch off the EK60 only by means of the on/off switch on the computer.
This may damage the software or the interface parameters for external devices. You
must ALWAYS use this procedure.
Procedure
1
Click File →Exit.
2
Observe that the EK60 application closes down.
3
If the computer does not switch itself off automatically, use the functionality
provided by the operating system to switch it off manually.
4
Switch off the colour display.
If required, refer to the instructions provided by the display manufacturer.
5
Switch off the transceiver(s).
The General Purpose Transceiver (GPT) is not provided with an on/off switch.
Unless a dedicated solution has been provided during the installation to facilitate
power on/off, you can leave the transceiver(s) on. However, if you know that the
EK60 is not to be used for a longer period of time, disconnect the power to the
transceiver(s).
20
164692/D
Operational procedures
Related topics
• Exit on page 85
Echogram procedures
These procedures explain the various parameters controlling the EK60 echogram.
Topics
• Changing the echogram settings on page 21
• Changing the range on page 21
• Changing the pulse duration to enhance the vertical resolution on page 22
• Defining minimum and maximum depth on page 22
Related topics
• Echogram view on page 58
• Depth view on page 55
• Echogram on page 144
• Bottom Range on page 149
• Surface Range on page 151
• Normal Operation on page 76
• Bottom Detection on page 140
Changing the echogram settings
Procedure
1 Position the cursor in the Echogram view.
2 Click the right mouse button.
3 Click Echogram on the short-cut menu, and observe that the Echogram dialog opens.
4 Make the desired changes.
5 Click Ok.
Related topics
• Echogram view on page 58
• Echogram on page 144
Changing the range
Procedure
1 Position the cursor in the Echogram view.
2 Click the right mouse button.
3 Click Range on the short-cut menu, and observe that either the Bottom Range or the
Surface Range dialog opens (depending on the current setting).
164692/D
21
Simrad EK60
4
5
Make the desired changes.
Click Ok.
Related topics
• Echogram view on page 58
• Bottom Range on page 149
• Surface Range on page 151
Changing the pulse duration to enhance the vertical
resolution
The vertical resolution of the echogram increases with a shorter pulse duration.
Example 1
Vertical resolution
A pulse duration of 1.024 millisecond gives a vertical resolution of 19.2 cm,
whereas a pulse duration of 0.256 millisecond gives a vertical resolution of 4.8
cm. If the vertical distance between two echoes is less than this, the two echoes
will be shown as one.
Tip
A small value gives the best resolution, while larger values provides you with a longer
detection range.
Procedure
1 Click Operation →Normal, and observe that the Normal Operation dialog opens.
2 Set the desired pulse duration for each of the frequency channels.
3 Click Ok.
Related topics
• Normal Operation on page 76
Defining minimum and maximum depth
Setting the minimum and maximum depth enables the echo sounder to search for bottom
lock.
Note
Setting both Minimum Depth and Maximum Depth to 0 m will turn off bottom detection.
Procedure
1 Position the cursor over the depth information in the Depth view.
2 Click the right mouse button.
3 Click Bottom Detector on the short-cut menu, and observe that the Bottom Detection
dialog opens.
22
164692/D
Operational procedures
4
Set minimum and maximum depth to the desired values.
5
Click Ok.
Related topics
• Depth view on page 55
• Bottom Detection on page 140
Investigating low ping rate
This procedure suggests a few checks you can make if the EK60 is unable to meet your
required ping interval.
In some cases you may for example see a relevant message — Cannot meet ping
interval requirement – that indicates that the EK60 fails to ping as fast as you
have specified.
The ping rate is normally limited by the maximum range settings.
It will also be dependant on hardware issues. This may be, for example, how fast
your computer can handle the information from each ping, how fast your system
communicates with external peripherals, how long time the system uses to save data, and
the transceiver recharging time.
Numerous parameter settings on your EK60 system may also affect the ping rate.
Observe these steps to investigate.
Procedure
1
Check the Max. range display in the Numerical view.
This values shows the maximum data collection range resulting from all settings
made in the EK60. If the value is value is higher than you may expect, observe
the remaining steps to locate the cause.
→ Numerical view on page 61
2
Check your current display range set by the Surface Range and Bottom Range
parameters for all views.
If you operate in shallow waters, but still has a large depth range applied, this can
reduce the maximum ping rate.
→ Surface Range on page 151
→ Bottom Range on page 149
3
Check the bottom detection parameters for all channels.
If the bottom detection ranges are set to a higher value than necessary, this can
reduce the maximum ping rate.
→ Bottom Detection on page 140
164692/D
23
Simrad EK60
4
Check the parameter settings for raw data storage.
Remember that you can set up range parameters on the Raw data tab in the File
Output dialog.
→ File Output on page 123
Tip
This check is only useful if you have enabled raw data output to file in the Raw data
tab in the File Output dialog.
5
Check the parameter settings for EK500 data output.
Remember that you can set up range parameters on the Range tab in the EK500
Datagram dialog.
→ EK500 Datagram on page 162
→ Surface Range on page 151
→ Bottom Range on page 149
Tip
This check is only useful if you have enabled EK500 data output to file and/or
Ethernet in the Ethernet Output dialog or on the Processed data tab in the File
Output dialog.
6
Check the performance of your computer and the hard disk(s) you use for data
storage.
7
Check the parameter settings for pulse duration and transmit power in the Normal
Operation dialog.
The recharging time of the transmitter output depends on the amount of energy in
the pulse. This energy depends on the pulse duration and transmit power selections
you have made. If the transmitter is unable to charge the capacitors fast enough, a
shorter pulse duration and/or lower transmit power may then increase the ping rate.
Tip
These limitations are normally only valid for very high ping rates.
24
164692/D
Operational procedures
Transceiver installation procedures
Use the following procedures to install, modify or delete frequency channels from the
echo sounder setup.
General Purpose Transceivers (GPT) physically connected to the echo sounder's Ethernet
interface are identified automatically by the system. When you open the Transceiver
Installation dialog from the Install menu, a list will be provided. A single frequency
transceiver occupies one entry in the list, and a dual frequency transceiver occupies two.
Each entry is identified as a frequency channel, and the line displays the parameters
for the channel. Entries in the frequency channel list are shown in black, green or red
colour identifying its current status.
Topics
• Installing a frequency channel on page 25
• Disconnecting a frequency channel on page 26
• Changing the IP address on page 26
Related topics
• Transceiver Installation on page 96
Installing a frequency channel
This procedure explains how to install a frequency channel.
Each transceiver contains one or more frequency channels.
This phrase is used to identify the combination of a transceiver, transducers and the
frequencies offered. Split beam transceivers contain only one channel each.
The upper part of the Transceiver Installation dialog displays a list of frequency channels
which either are, or have been, installed on the EK60. For each channel on the list,
a colour coded text is provided.
The following status values are available in the Transceiver Installation dialog.
• Entries shown in black are detected frequency channels which are not installed, but
available for installation.
• Entries shown in green are detected frequency channels, which are both detected
and installed.
• Entries shown in blue are detected frequency channels which are installed by another
echo sounder program, and thus not available for this application.
• Entries shown in red are frequency channels which have previously been installed,
but are no longer available.
Procedure
1
Click Install →Transceiver.
164692/D
25
Simrad EK60
2
3
4
5
Observe that the Transceiver Installation dialog opens
The purpose of the Transceiver Installation dialog is to set up the necessary
parameters to connect the EK60 computer to the transceiver(s) and the transducer(s).
→ Transceiver Installation on page 96
In the Transceiver Installation dialog, click Browse.
The EK60 will automatically search the network for transceivers.
Observe that all the frequency channels are listed in the dialog.
Select a frequency channel that is available, and choose the correct transducer in
the spin box.
Note
This is a critical task. You must ensure that the correct transducer is selected. If
you connect the transceiver to a transducer that can not handle the power rating, it
may be damaged beyond repair.
6
7
Click OK to save the current settings and close the dialog.
Restart the echo sounder.
Related topics
• Transceiver Installation on page 96
Disconnecting a frequency channel
This procedure explains how to disconnect a frequency channel.
Procedure
1 Click Install →Transceiver.
2 Observe that the Transceiver Installation dialog opens
3 Click the desired entry in the Frequency Channel Selection list.
4 Select the alternative None in the Transducer Selection list.
5 Click OK to accept the choice and exit the dialog.
6 Restart the echo sounder.
Related topics
• Transceiver Installation on page 96
Changing the IP address
This procedure explains how to change the IP address of the General Purpose Transceiver
(GPT) unit.
Procedure
1 Select Install →Transceiver.
2 Observe that the Transceiver Installation dialog opens
3 Observe the Transceiver browsing field.
26
164692/D
Operational procedures
4
Enter the new IP address.
The default IP addresses are:
• 18 kHz GPT: 157.237.15.3
• 38 kHz GPT: 157.237.15.5
• 70 kHz GPT: 157.237.15.7
• 120 kHz GPT: 157.237.15.8
• 200 kHz GPT: 157.237.15.9
• 333 kHz GPT: 157.237.15.10
• Computer: 157.237.15.12
In a dual frequency system the lowest frequency sets the IP address.
5
Click OK to accept the choice and exit the Transceiver Installation dialog.
6
Restart the echo sounder.
Related topics
• Transceiver Installation on page 96
164692/D
27
Simrad EK60
Data recording and playback procedures
These procedures explain how to save and recall raw data.
Topics
• Recording raw data on page 28
• Play back raw data on page 29
Related topics
• File Output on page 123
• Replay on page 78
Recording raw data
You can set up the echo sounder to record unprocessed transducer signals (sample data)
and external sensor information onto files. These files contain the necessary information
to reconstruct the situation during the real survey. The echo sounder program reads
these files during replay.
Procedure
1 Click File →Output, and observe that the File Output dialog opens.
2 Click the Directory tab, and click the Browse button if you wish to change the
directory to which the files are stored.
3 Click the Raw Data tab to define how the raw data is to be recorded.
• Save raw data: Start/stop recording of raw data.
• Range: Select the depth range to be recorded. This range, referring to the
transducer face, is independent of any other range settings in the echo sounder.
• Echogram data: This is user defined excerpts of the processed sample data (pixel
data), ie the backscatter value of the targets. The echograms are stored as time
tagged datagrams in separate files.
4 Click Ok to exit the dialog.
5 Use either the toolbar buttons or the Save raw data check box in the File Output
dialog to start or stop recording of data.
6 During recording, observe the size of the stored raw data.
The size of the raw data files stored depends on several user selections. From these
selections you may estimate approximately the total amount of raw data stored in a
given time period for each installed channel using the following equation:
X=B
•
•
•
•
•
28
R 8
c T
M 24 3600
X = Total amount of stored raw data in bytes for one channel
B = 4 (Given by the resolution of the sample data)
R = Selected range in meters (User defined)
c = Sound speed in water in meters per sec (User defined)
T = Pulse duration in seconds (User defined)
164692/D
Operational procedures
• M = Ping rate in ping per seconds (User defined)
• 24 = hours
• 3600 = seconds per hour
Thus, you can affect the amount of stored raw data by changing e.g. the range,
pulse duration, and ping rate settings.
Related topics
• File Output on page 123
Play back raw data
Procedure
1 Play back single file
a Click Operation →Replay, and observe that the Replay dialog opens.
b Select the single file to be played.
If no file is listed, click the Add button to select. Note that only one replay file
can be listed if this single file shall be replayed.
c Click Loop if you wish to loop through the selected file endlessly.
d Click Ok.
e Click the Play button in the toolbar.
2 Play back multiple files
Even though you only select one file in the Replay dialog, the EK60 will play
through all of them in the same order as they are listed. If the loop function is
enabled, the playback will return to the first file, and play through all of them one
more time. This will be repeated until the playback is stopped.
During playback, the ping rate is not limited by the speed of sound in water. Hence,
it is possible to select a higher ping rate than during normal operation.
a Click Operation →Replay, and observe that the Replay dialog opens.
b Click the Add button to select playback files
• You can place any number of files in the list in the Replay dialog.
c Click Loop if you wish to loop through the selected file endlessly.
d Click Ok.
e Click the “Play” button in the toolbar.
3 Playback including trawl datagrams
When you play back raw data, the Trawl dialog on the Install menu is unavailable.
This means that although you play back the data with the trawl datagrams intact,
you may not be able to see them. In order to rectify this, observe the following
procedure before you start the playback.
a Click Install →Trawl
b In the Trawl dialog, set System to either Trawl, PI or Ifremer according to the
datagrams you wish to see.
164692/D
29
Simrad EK60
c
Select manual parameters if required.
Note
If the distance from the vessel to the trawl is different from 0 (zero), you will
need to enable the distance counter in the Navigation dialog.
d
Click Ok.
e
Start replay.
Related topics
• Replay on page 78
Noise measurements at sea
The final result of the noise measurements should be a plot of the acoustic noise in front
of the transducer versus vessel speed. This plot may be compared with similar plots for
other transducers on the same vessel, or plots from other vessels. It may thus serve as
an evaluation of the transducer location and the vessel noise radiation. In addition, the
noise plot may be a guide in choosing the vessel speed during acoustic surveys. Since
the propeller pitch and revolutions per minute influence the noise level, it is important to
determine the most favorable combination of these factors. Normally a slow rotation and
a high pitch give the lowest noise.
Topics
• Basic guidelines on page 30
• Noise measurement procedure on page 31
• Test results on page 33
• Evaluation on page 33
Basic guidelines
The noise measurements should take place at least one nautical mile off shore, away
from other ship traffic and with calm sea. The water depth should be 200 m or more to
avoid propeller noise reflections from the seabed. The important parameter to evaluate is
the noise directly radiated from the propeller into the transducer. This noise should be
measured at different vessel speeds, from 0 to maximum speed in steps of 1 or 2 knots.
The vessel’s course must be kept steady during these measurements.
The noise level for 38 kHz with the vessel in deep water and without sailing should be
approximately -145 dBW or lower. Minor increase can be expected for higher and lower
frequencies. When the speed increases the noise level will normally increase as well,
but a properly designed vessel should only show a modest increase and mainly when
approaching the maximum speed.
30
164692/D
Operational procedures
With the settings specified below, the printer may be used to produce an echogram as
documentation for all the installed transceivers. With some experience it should be
possible to reveal the acoustic noise source from looking at the echogram. Typical
sources may be propeller cavitation, small damages on the propeller blade, the
machinery, or flow-noise. It is a good routine to save the echogram for comparison with
later recordings. The propeller noise will often be revealed by the pattern shown on the
echogram. The distance between succeeding high intensity fields in the pattern should
correspond with the number of propeller blades and the rotation speed.
Electrical noise from the ship’s mains supply and electrical motors will give a pattern
with distinct lines on the echogram determined by the frequency of the mains supply.
By choosing a convenient range for the echogram, the distance between the lines will
give a good indication of the frequency causing the noise.
Noise speed tests should be performed after all the frequencies have been calibrated. All
the frequencies can be measured simultaneously. Thus, you should install all transceivers
in EK60.
Noise measurement procedure
Initial set-up
Procedure
1 Click Install →Transceiver, and observe that the Transceiver Installation dialog opens.
2 Ensure that all the transceivers are installed.
3 Click Operation →Normal, and observe that the Normal Operation dialog opens.
4 Set the following parameters:
• Passive mode
• Maximum transmit power
• Same pulse duration as used during the calibration
• 0.0 m transducer depth
5 Click Operation →Ping Control, and observe that the Ping Control dialog opens.
6 Set the following parameters:
• Maximum ping rate
• Switch off all external triggering
7 Right-click in the Echogram view, and select Echogram on the short-cut menu
to open the Echogram dialog.
8 Set the following parameters:
• Surface reference
• Sv backscatter
9 Right-click in the Colour Scale view, and select Colour Scale on the short-cut menu
to open the Colour Scale dialog.
10 Set the following parameters:
164692/D
31
Simrad EK60
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
• Minimum level -100 dB (chosen to give a reasonable ping rate)
• Maximum level -64 dB
Right-click in the Echogram view, and select Range on the short-cut menu to open
the Surface Range dialog.
Set the following parameters:
• Start relative surface: 0 m
• Select a range that will provide a noise recording with at least two or three
colours on the echogram.
Right-click in the Echogram view, and select Bottom Detection on the short-cut
menu to open the Bottom Detection dialog.
Set the following parameters:
• Bottom detection = 0.0 m
• This disables the bottom detection algorithm. This algorithm reduces the ping
rate in passive mode, and it is not required.
Click Output →File, and observe that the File Output dialog opens.
Set the following parameters:
• Same range as in the echogram
• 0 Mb maximum file size
Start the echo sounder.
Increasing speed
Procedure
1 Start the test loop with vessel speed 0 knots.
2 Make a short echogram recording, find the noise level in the Numerical view, and
note down the values.
3 Increase the vessel speed with 1 or 2 knots, and wait until the speed is stable.
4 Repeat the loop until the vessel has reached maximum speed.
Decreasing speed
Procedure
1 Start with maximum vessel speed.
2 Start echogram recording
3 Disengage the propeller as quickly as possible to allow the vessel to slow down
by itself.
4 Use the annotation or event features to tag each 1 or 2 knots speed decrease.
5 Stop the echogram recording once the vessel has stopped.
If the noise decreases quickly towards the same level as at 0 knots when the propeller
has been disengaged, this means that the propeller mainly generates the noise. If the
noise at decreasing vessel speed is more or less equal to the noise level at increasing
speed, the noise is probable flow-noise. Usually the noise is a combination of both.
32
164692/D
Operational procedures
Test results
Print this table, and use it to fill in the measured values.
Engine revolutions
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
(rpm)
Propeller revolutions
(rpm)
Propeller pitch
Vessel speed
(knots)
Estimated noise level
(dB*)
Estimated noise level
(dB**)
Engine revolutions
(rpm)
Propeller revolutions
(rpm)
Propeller pitch
Vessel speed
(knots)
Estimated noise level
(dB*)
Estimated noise level
(dB**)
(*) Estimated noise level measured in dB re 1W
(**) Estimated noise level
measured in dB re 1 μ Pa / Hz
(CD010015A)
Evaluation
If the noise is substantial and mainly caused by the propeller, the procedure should
be repeated with different combinations of pitch and propeller speed if possible, to
determine the most favourable settings.
The echogram recording will give you immediate information regarding the maximum
possible detection range for the chosen settings. The light grey colour on the echogram
relates the depth where the noise will mask the useful echo from biomass.
In order to allow the echogram to indicate the depth where the selected back-scattering
is reached, make the following settings:
• In the Echogram dialog, set Backscatter = Sv (20 Log TVG).
• In the Colour Scale dialog, set the desired lower Sv limit.
Example: If the desired lower Sv limit is -70 dB, and at the same time a signal-to-noise
ration of 10 dB is required, the setting in the Colour Scale dialog for 20 log TVG must be
-80 dB. The depth where the light grey colour appears on the echogram then indicates
the maximum depth where the desired Sv limit is obtained with a signal-to-noise ratio
of 10 dB.
When you select Backscatter = Sp (40 log TVG) in the Echogram dialog to record single
object target strength, the desired lower TS limit has to be set in the same way as above.
164692/D
33
Simrad EK60
Example: If the desired lower TS limit is -50 dB, and at the same time a signal-to-noise
ratio of 10 dB is required, the setting in the Colour Scale dialog for 40 log TVG must be
-60 dB. The depth where the light grey colour appears on the echogram then indicates
the maximum depth where the desired lower TS limit is obtained with a signal-to-noise
ratio of 10 dB.
Multiplexer setup
Use the following procedures to connect the multiplexer unit to the echo sounder
transceiver, and to enable it for operational use.
Topics
• Connecting the multiplexer on page 34
• Setting up the transceiver on page 34
• Technical information on page 35
Related topics
• Transceiver Installation on page 96
Connecting the multiplexer
The multiplexer unit consists of a single metal box with two cables. Both cables are
terminated with plugs.
Procedure
1 Switch off the echo sounder system.
2 Connect the cable with the transducer plug to the transducer socket on the echo
sounder transceiver.
3 Connect the cable with the D-Connector to the Auxiliary socket on the echo sounder
transceiver.
4 Makes sure that the two transducers are properly connected to the multiplexer unit.
5 Power up the echo sounder system.
Setting up the transceiver
Procedure
1 Start up the echo sounder.
2 Click Install →Transceiver, and observe that the Transceiver Installation dialog opens.
3 Click to select a valid frequency channel, and make sure that a transducer is shown
under Transducer Selection.
4 In the Multiplexer Installation list, click Mux-2.
5 In the confirmation dialog, click Yes to acknowledge the choice.
6 In the Transceiver Installation dialog, click Ok.
34
164692/D
Operational procedures
7
In the second confirmation dialog, click Yes to acknowledge the choice.
8
In the restart dialog, click Ok.
9
Click Operation →Exit to close the echo sounder application.
10 Restart the EK60.
Related topics
• Transceiver Installation on page 96
Technical information
The use of the two transducers connected to the multiplexer is controlled by the Alarm
output (pin 11) on the General Purpose Transceiver (GPT) Auxiliary connector.
• The alarm output goes “low” (0 V) approximately 10 milliseconds prior to
transmission on channel X–1.
• The alarm output goes “high” (5 V) approximately 10 milliseconds prior to
transmission on channel X–2.
164692/D
35
Simrad EK60
EK60 calibration
This chapter explains how to do a single beam calibration of the Simrad EK60.
Topics
• Basic information about calibration on page 37
• Transducer maintenance on page 37
• Calibration procedures on page 38
– Check installation on page 38
– Anchoring on page 40
– Winches on page 41
– Attaching the sphere on page 42
– Lowering the sphere on page 43
– Reference target on page 43
– Calibration on page 44
– Views on page 46
– Data editing on page 48
– Updating transducer parameters on page 49
– Previously recorded data on page 49
– Offline calibration on page 49
36
164692/D
EK60 calibration
Basic information about calibration
In order to maintain the accuracy provided by the Simrad EK60 and that is required for
scientific applications, it must be calibrated.
During calibration a reference target with known target strength is lowered into the sound
beam, and the measured target strength is compared with the known target strength. If it
is necessary to adjust the echo sounder, this is performed automatically by the calibration
software. Since the echo sounder is digital right from the receiver front end, no analogue
gain adjustment is required.
The reference target is normally a metal sphere. Simrad supplies a variety of copper
spheres, one for each frequency. The sphere diameter is selected for minimum
temperature dependence.
Important
If you later choose to uninstall a transducer, the transceiver must be calibrated one more
time. However, you may reenter the measured target strength (TS) from a previous
calibration, as well as the reference target strength for the calibration sphere you used.
If you have a EK60 system with several transceivers, you must calibrate one by one.
Make sure that you set all other transceivers to Passive in the Normal Operation dialog.
Transducer maintenance
The transducer is heavily exposed to fouling. Make sure that the transducer face is
painted after installation, and that the paint is maintained whenever the vessel is in dry
dock. Always use an approved anti-fouling paint.
Depending on the environmental conditions where the vessel operates, fouling must be
removed from time to time. Failing to do so will degrade the echo sounder performance.
Use a soft piece of wood and remove the fouling carefully. Afterwards, use a very fine
grade emery paper.
164692/D
37
Simrad EK60
Note
All transducers must be handled as delicate items. Any wrongful handling may damage
the transducer beyond repair.
Do not activate the transducer when it is out of the water.
Do not lift the transducer by the cable.
Do not step on the transducer cable.
Do not handle the transducer roughly, avoid impacts.
Do not expose the transducer to direct sunlight or excessive heat.
Do not use high pressure water, sand blasting or metal tools to clean the transducer face.
Do not use strong solvents to clean the transducer face.
Calibration procedures
This section holds the calibration procedures.
Topics
• Check installation on page 38
• Anchoring on page 40
• Winches on page 41
• Attaching the sphere on page 42
• Lowering the sphere on page 43
• Reference target on page 43
• Calibration on page 44
• Views on page 46
• Data editing on page 48
• Updating transducer parameters on page 49
• Previously recorded data on page 49
• Offline calibration on page 49
Check installation
1
2
3
38
Check that the echo sounder and all the transceivers and transducers are installed
correctly, and that they are all fully functional.
Measure the water salinity and temperature between the transducer and the sphere
depth.
Calculate the average salinity and temperature values, and enter these data in the
Environment dialog.
→ Environment on page 110
164692/D
EK60 calibration
• The sound velocity is automatically calculated by the echo sounder.
• The corresponding absorption coefficient is calculated by the echo sounder
according to Francois & Garrison, JASA December 1982.
Note
When you calculate the target strength (TS), you must use the sound velocity at
the sphere's depth.
4
Use the echo sounder to check that operation in Normal mode functions properly
for all transducers.
Figure 2
Sound speed in water
Sound speed (in m/s) (at depth 0 m)
1550
Mackenzie (1981) J.acoust.Soc.Am., 70,807-12.
Del Grosso (1972) J.acoust.Soc.Am., 52,1442-6.
Salinity 40
1500
Salinity 0
1450
1400
0
(CD010014B)
164692/D
5
10
15
Water temperature (in
20
o
25
30
C)
39
Simrad EK60
Figure 3
Sound absorption
Sound absorption (dB/km)
60
from: Francois & Garrison, JASA, December 1982
o
10 C
200 m depth
pH = 8
50
35%
ITY
LIN
A
S
30
40
25
20
30
15
10
20
5
10
0
0
0
25
(CD010014A)
50
75
100
125
Frequency (kHz)
150
175
200
Anchoring
The following rigging description is to a great extent reproduced from ICES report 144.
1
Find a location with calm and sheltered water.
• Avoid areas with large differences in tidal height, as this gives strong tidal current.
• Avoid areas near river mouths and harbours with heavy traffic.
• An area with little or no fish present is favourable.
2
Ensure that the depth is sufficient for separation of sphere and bottom echoes.
3
Pull a rope beneath the hull from one side of the vessel to the other.
4
Anchor the vessel.
It is desirable to work in water as deep as possible, consistent with maintaining a stable
platform. Both bow and stern anchoring or mooring is recommended.
40
164692/D
EK60 calibration
If the vessel is anchored or moored only fore or aft, the wind will cause it to drift
sideways. If the current then attacks with a different angle, it will make a bad situation
even worse. If the vessel is allowed to move sideways, or if the current runs abeam, this
will normally give larger variations in the echo sounder performance. This results in
poor and not reliable calibration accuracy.
Winches
We recommend the use of winches to guide and steer the lines to the sphere for its
centring in the echo sounder beam. These winches must be mounted to the deck railing
in accordance with detailed ship drawings.
1
Place the first winch in the transverse plane of the vessel running through the
transducer.
If the transducer is mounted on one side of the keel, place the first winch on the
opposite side of the vessel.
2
Place the second and third winches on the same vessel side as the transducer and at
equal distances from the transverse section containing the transducer and first winch.
164692/D
41
Simrad EK60
Figure 4
Rigging the vessel for sphere calibration
(CD010014C)
WINCH 1
WINCH 3
WINCH 2
Each winch must be provided with a long spool of 0.60 mm diameter monofilament
nylon line, which is marked with small swivels at 5 m intervals, beginning 10 m from
the loose end. The purpose of the swivels is threefold:
• to unravel rotation of the nylon line
• to mark distances on the line
• to add weight so that the line sinks in water
Attaching the sphere
1
2
3
42
Locate the rope pulled beneath the hull before anchoring.
Use this rope to pull the line from the first winch beneath the hull to the side with
the second and third winches.
Attach the appropriate sphere, with affixed loop, to the three suspension lines.
For the smaller spheres it may be necessary to add a weight to keep the sphere stable.
This is done via a second line attached to the three suspension lines. The length of
164692/D
EK60 calibration
the line must be at least two pulse lengths, so that the echo from the additional
weight does not interfere with the sphere echo. Immerse the sphere in a solution
of dishwasher detergent and freshwater and lift it overboard by the fastened lines
without touching it. The soap helps to eliminate air bubbles attached to the sphere.
Lowering the sphere
Lower the sphere beneath the vessel to the desired depth, for example 25 m, which is
determined roughly by counting the swivels on each line.
The required depth is mainly determined by the transducer beam width and the vessel
geometry. The physical width of the beam, which increases linearly with range, should
be sufficiently great so that the sphere echo is unaffected by the small movements to
which it is inevitably subjected.
In most cases calibration will be performed at depths larger than 10 m. However, the
chosen depth should be limited to ensure that it is possible to cover the entire beam. The
minimal depth must also be convenient with respect to the vessel geometry. In particular,
if the suspension lines do not hang freely, then control of the sphere may be hindered by
friction or possible obstructions on the hull. Despite the number and variety of these
considerations, it is seldom difficult in practice to find a suitable depth, which satisfies
all of the above criteria.
Reference target
Simrad supplies copper spheres designed as reference targets for the calibration of
scientific sounders. Copper is selected because it is a metal which can be made
electrolytically with high purity. The spheres are machined to the perfect spherical
form with great accuracy, and a nylon loop is attached. Except for 12 kHz, 49 kHz and
50 kHz, the sphere diameter is different for each frequency in order to obtain a target
strength with minimum dependence of temperature (K. Foote 1983). A curve showing
the variation of the target strength follows each sphere.
Table 1
Copper spheres
Frequency (kHz)
Diameter (mm)
Target strength (dB)
12
45,0
–40,4
18
63,0
–34,4
27
42,0
–37,9
38
60,0
–33,6
49
45,0
–36,4
50
45,0
–36,2
70
32,1
–39,1
120
23,0
–40,4
200
13,7
–45,0
164692/D
43
Simrad EK60
Table 1
Copper spheres (cont'd.)
Frequency (kHz)
Diameter (mm)
Target strength (dB)
710
10,3
–50,5
Target strength calculated for sound speed 1490 m/s. The same sphere is used for 49 and 50
kHz.
The curve for the 38 kHz sphere is given as an illustration.
Figure 5
Target strength of a 60 mm copper sphere
-33.0
60 mm copper sphere, 38 kHz
1400
3.0
0.3
(CD010014D)
-34.5
Target strength (dB)
-34.0
-33.5
Pulse duration (ms)
1420
1440
1460 1480 1500
Sound speed (m/s)
1520
1540
1560
Calibration
Only one frequency may be calibrated at a time.
Note
When you calculate the target strength (TS), you must use the sound velocity at the
sphere's depth.
All the different combinations of pulse duration and transmitter power for each frequency
that will be used during normal operation of the echo sounder must be calibrated. First,
create a well organised file directory for the calibration results.
Example:
44
164692/D
EK60 calibration
c:\er60\calibration\2003\38kHz\0.256msec\
The same structure can be repeated for the different pulse duration for each frequency.
When you save the calibration file, create a file name that includes the current date and
the current output power. Save the information as a TXT file.
Example:
....\0.256msec\cal010603-2000w.txt
While the calibration takes place, we recommend that you also collect a raw data file.
Browse the file directory in the Store dialog to locate the correct directory. The raw
data file name will be generated automatically, but you may specify a prefix. The raw
data file is used for replay.
The same procedure can be repeated for each of the installed frequencies. Observe the
following calibration procedure.
1
Click Operation →Ping control.
2
In the Ping Control dialog, set Ping rate to Interval and 1 second.
• This can also be done from the toolbar.
3
Click Operation →Normal.
4
In the Normal Operation dialog:
5
a
Select transceiver, and switch to Active mode.
b
Set the Transmit Power to the level you wish to calibrate.
c
Choose the Pulse Duration you wish to calibrate.
Right-click in an echogram, select Range on the short-cut menu, and set the range
for one of the echogram views to cover the range you wish to see.
• This range should include the depth range where you expect to find the reference
target.
6
7
Check that you see the reference target in the Single Echo view.
Right-click in the Single Echo view corresponding to the echogram to open the
Single Target Detection dialog.
8
In the Single Target Detection dialog, click the Calibration button to start the
calibration program, and to create a new Calibration window.
• The calibration program allows you to record new calibration data, or read
previously recorded calibration data.
9
In the Calibration window, click File →New to open the Record dialog and to start
a new calibration.
164692/D
45
Simrad EK60
10 Enter the following data in the Record dialog:
a
Transducer’s serial number
b
Correct theoretical target strength (TS) for the reference target
c
Allowed deviation from the TS for the reference target
• This is a window giving the limits for the system’s acceptance of single
target echoes coming from fish. The closer to the correct reference target
TS the limits have been set, the more of the unwanted fish echoes will be
rejected. On the other hand, if the echo from the reference target is too
close to one of the limits, the deviation has to be increased before starting
collecting data. This is because it will always be a certain variation in TS
values when the reference target is being moved to cover the complete beam.
d
Upper and lower depth limits for the target window
• A narrow window will have same effect as above, reducing the possibility of
detecting unwanted echoes from fish.
e
Any comments you may wish to add to the calibration file
11 Click OK when you have finished entering data.
The calibration program will now begin recording data.
Views
You will see two views in the Calibration window; a Plot view and an Information view.
A vertical bar is shown on the left side of each view. A blue colour indicates that the
view is active, while gray colour indicates a passive view. If you wish to print a view,
or perform other operations connected to it, you must make sure that the desired view
is active.
In the Plot view you will see recorded data plotted as blue and red circles. Blue circles
indicate TS values below the current beam model, while red circles indicate values
above the current beam model. In the upper part of the Information view you will see
various information associated with recording of the calibration data. Lines containing
this information all begin with a #. Below this information, recorded values for each new
TS detection are updated continuously during data recording.
1
Move the reference target slowly around to record a sufficient number of data points
(>100) evenly distributed inside the beam. Make sure that a reasonable number of
hits are made close to the centre of the beam. This is important in order to ensure a
correct estimate for the Sa correction parameter.
2
While moving the target you should keep the reference target within the depth
limits you entered in the Record dialog.
3
While moving the target and recording of data points stops, the measured TS value
may be outside the limits entered in the Record dialog.
4
Stop and restart recording as required by using the Stop/Start command found in the
Main menu. It is recommended to stop collecting data if unwanted fish echoes are
entering into the depth window, and restart again when disappeared.
46
164692/D
EK60 calibration
5
6
7
When you have finished data recording, click File →Save As to open the Save As
dialog.
Choose the directory where you want the calibration file to be saved, and enter a file
name for your calibration file.
Click Save to finish.
The calibration program will now use two different models to fit recorded data, a
polynomial model and a beam model.
The Plot view will plot the model along with the recorded data points. Blue circles
indicate values below the model; red circles indicate values above the model. The green
circles close to the centre axis indicate the points that have been used when estimating
the Sa Correction value.
In the View menu located on the menu bar you can control what is shown in the Plot
view. You can choose between results from the polynomial model or the beam model.
In the View menu you can also choose the plot type for each of the two models. If you
choose the Polar command you will see a polar plot from “above”. The other plot types
are cartesian showing a slice through the model. You may toggle between the plot types
using the space bar on your keyboard. The polynomial model is a flexible function
capable of modelling complex function shapes.
The polynomial model is only used to check in the Plot view that the estimated
polynomial model has the same shape as the shape of the beam model. If the shape of the
polynomial model is very different from the shape of the beam model, this indicates that
either insufficient data have been collected, or some data points may be associated with
errors (broken cables or channel wires mixed).
The beam model is the model actually used by the echo sounder.
The calibration program will adjust the parameters in the beam model to minimise the
RMS error calculated on the recorded data points. The adjusted parameters, the RMS
error, and the data points having maximum and minimum deviation from the model
are shown in the Information view. The adjusted parameters resulting from the beam
model are the parameters, which can be transferred to the echo sounder and used for the
transducer during operation. Information on data deviation from the beam model will
indicate how well the beam model fit the recorded data. This can be used to evaluate
the validity of the recorded data points.
The data evaluation should start using the Plot view and the polynomial model to check
the shape of the polar plot. A circular transducer should have a circular beam and an
elliptic transducer an ellipse, both with only insignificant offset angles. If a circular
transducer in the Plot view shows an ellipse with approximately 45 or 135 degrees axis,
the reason may be one missing quadrant in the transducer or one missing quadrant in the
receiver. This symptom should also give approximately 2 dB lower TS, i.e. 1dB lower
transducer gain to compensate.
If a circular transducer in the Plot view shows an non circular shape, and in addition
substantial offset angles both athwart and alongship, this indicates there may be
something wrong in the way the transducer is connected. In this case, you must select the
View menu and check the calibrated beamwidth, offset and gain values. If one quadrant
164692/D
47
Simrad EK60
of the transducer is inversely connected, the beamwidth will be approximately one
degree too wide, the offset angles will be approximately one degree off centre in both
directions and the calibrated gain can be in the order of 6 dB lower than the default gain.
If two of the quadrants have been mixed up, the reference sphere’s movements inside the
beam will be incorrect. This can be confirmed when the reference sphere is suspended in
such a way that you can move it in a specific direction. This direction is either transversal
or longitudinal in the transducer beam. However, this is only possible if the split beam
transducer has been correctly installed.
Data editing
In both the Information and Plot views, you may perform data editing in the sense of
excluding or including an accepted single echo detection. A left or right mouse click
will act as a toggle function for this editing. The model is completely recalculated for
each change.
In the Information view, a suspended single echo will be identified with an asterisk
(*) on the left side of the view.
The Plot view will draw an “empty” circle to indicate suspension of the single echo entry.
The data deviation from the beam model should for a good calibration give a RMS
value less than 0.2 dB. If unwanted echoes have been observed during data collection,
these should preferably be removed from the file. If, when collecting data, fish swim
into the layer that includes the reference target, then note where in the file this happens,
and delete these echoes before the beam data are updated. Data with large deviation
from the calculated curve are may be caused by poor acoustic conditions or by back
scattering objects other than the reference target. Isolated echoes with large deviation
from the calculated beam pattern can be removed, but when a large amount of the
collected data diverge from the average, this indicates that the acoustic conditions has
been unfavourable. When the RMS value is in between 0.2 and 0.4 dB, this indicates
conditions is not perfect but still acceptable. When the RMS value is higher than 0.4 dB
the calibration is poor, and should preferably be rejected and not used for updating of
the transducer parameters.
48
164692/D
EK60 calibration
Updating transducer parameters
When you are satisfied with the calibration results you can use the results to update your
transducer parameters in the echo sounder.
1
In the Calibration window, click File →Update Beam Data to perform this task.
Note
This is a serious operation, which will affect the transducer installation parameters
and will thus affect all future results to be obtained using the current transducer
and pulse duration. Thus, to prevent accidentally use of this operation, you are
asked to confirm this operation.
The changes take effect automatically the next time you start normal operations on
the echo sounder.
Previously recorded data
The Calibration program also allows you to work with previously recorded calibration
data.
If you have used the EK60 to record raw data from a previous calibration session you
may operate the EK60 in replay mode and perform the described calibration procedure
as if the EK60 was operating in Normal mode. When operating in Replay mode you can
set the ping rate to maximum since this will not affect the data quality.
Offline calibration
The calibration program may be run off-line without an operational EK60. To start it,
locate the file calibration.exe. If you have performed a standard installation, this file
is normally found in the following path:
c:\program files\simrad\scientific\ek60
\bin\calibration.exe
If you have a calibration file previously generated by the calibration program, you can
import the file in the calibration program.
1
In the Calibration window, click File →Open.
2
Select the file you would like to import, and click Ok.
3
Examine and edit the previously recorded calibration data.
Edited data may be saved and you can update the transducer parameters using the
imported or edited calibration data. This also enables you to use different calibration
files from different environmental conditions.
164692/D
49
Simrad EK60
Display views
This chapter provides a brief overview of the information displayed by the Simrad EK60,
and how the information is organized.
Topics
• Display organization on page 51
• Main menu on page 52
• Toolbars on page 52
• Status Bar on page 53
• Channel windows on page 54
– Depth view on page 55
– Single target position view on page 56
– Single target histogram view on page 57
– Echogram view on page 58
– Scope view on page 59
– Colour scale view on page 60
– Numerical view on page 61
50
164692/D
Display views
Display organization
The EK60 display is organized as follows (from top):
• Main menu
• Toolbar
• A number of Channel Windows
• Status bar
A display with three channels windows (operating three echo sounder frequencies
simultaneously) is shown as an example.
Figure 6
164692/D
Display example
51
Simrad EK60
Main menu
The EK60 main menu is located at the top of the echo sounder window.
To operate, click on the menu name and observe the drop-down menu. Select a new item
on the drop-down menu by clicking on the command.
Commands shown with light grey colour are unavailable in the present configuration or
operational mode.
A detailed description of the commands available from the main menu is given in the
Reference section.
Related topics
• The menu system on page 62
Toolbars
The EK60 toolbars are located directly underneath, or next to the main menu.
The toolbars are provided to offer fast access to dialogs and functions that are frequently
used.
Two toolbars may be applied:
• Normal operation
• Easy operation
You can choose which toolbar to use by means of the Toolbar command on the View
menu.
Important
The Normal operation toolbar is not available during replay.
Figure 7
Toolbar, Easy operation
Figure 8
Tool bar, Normal operation
The functions (from left) provided by the two toolbars - and the equivalent dialog buttons
and controls - are listed in the two tables below.
52
164692/D
Display views
Table 2
Easy operation toolbar
Tool bar button
Equivalent
Dialog
Start pinging [►]
Start
Ping control
Perform single ping [►1]
Single step
Ping control
Stop pinging [●]
Stop
Ping control
Set ping rate
Ping rate
Ping control
Start raw data recording [►]
Start recording
File output
Stop raw data recording [●]
Stop recording
File output
Initiate annotation [A]
Annotation text input
Annotation
Generate event [E]
Annotation text input
Annotation
Table 3
Normal operation toolbar
Tool bar button
Equivalent
Dialog
Select channel
—
—
Select mode
Mode
Normal Operation
Related topics
• Toolbars on page 86
Status Bar
The Status Bar is located at the bottom of the EK60 presentation.
It presents messages from the echo sounder system as well as a warning field on the
right hand side.
The purpose of the Status Bar is to give you fast access to key information.
It can be enabled or disabled using the Status Bar choice on the View menu, and set up by
clicking the right mouse button while the cursor is located within the Status Bar borders.
When all information has been enabled, and if the relevant sensors have been connected
to the EK60, the Status Bar will provide the following information (from left):
• Current messages
• Current vessel pitch in degrees
• Current vessel roll in degrees
• Current vessel heave in meters
• Event number
• Current heading
• Current vessel speed in knots
164692/D
53
Simrad EK60
• Distance in nautical miles or meters
• Geographical position
• Recording status
• Date and time
Choose to display local or GMT time using the Local Time function on the Options
menu.
• Warning messages
The Warnings field on the far right side of the status bar is a button. When a warning
has been issued, the button will be lit with a colour and a text indicating the nature of
the message. To investigate further, click the button.
Related topics
• Configure Statusbar on page 161
• Status Bar on page 87
• Warnings on page 165
• Local Time on page 92
Channel windows
The EK60 channel window is the main information bearer on the echo sounder display.
One channel window is provided for each operational frequency, and you can have many
channel windows open simultaneously. Each channel window contains several views.
Topics
• Depth view on page 55
• Single target position view on page 56
• Single target histogram view on page 57
• Echogram view on page 58
• Scope view on page 59
• Colour scale view on page 60
• Numerical view on page 61
54
164692/D
Display views
Depth view
(CD010012B)
The Depth view comprises the horizontal view directly below the toolbar. The view
displays the current depth.
If you click the right mouse button with the cursor position within this view, a dedicated
short-cut menu will appear. If you press the middle mouse button, the Bottom Detection
dialog will open.
Related topics
• Depth short-cut menu on page 68
• Bottom Detection on page 140
164692/D
55
Simrad EK60
Single target position view
The Single target position view is normally located in the top left corner.
This view shows the position within the beam of the
detected single echoes for the current ping (largest
circles) and the three previous pings (smaller circles),
all in the active layer. The colours used to display this
information are determined from current target strength
(TS) value and the settings in the colour scale.
If you place the cursor inside the view, a small yellow
label will appear to give you a detailed read-out of
certain information. The Tooltip dialog defines which
information that will be shown.
If you press the right mouse button with the cursor
position within this view, a dedicated short-cut menu
will appear.
If you press the middle mouse button, the Single Target
Detection dialog will open.
• Single Target Position short-cut menu on page 69
• Tooltip on page 91
(CD010012C)
Related topics
• Single Target Detection on page 141
56
164692/D
Display views
Single target histogram view
The histogram plot shows a visualisation of the target
strength (TS) distribution for the single echoes detected
in the Echogram view. The colours used to display
this information are determined from the current target
strength (TS) value and the settings in the colour scale.
The statistics are based on the active layer and the
current calculation interval.
(CD010012D)
The Single target histogram view is normally located in the bottom left corner of the
display presentation
If you place the cursor inside the view, a small yellow
label will appear to give you a detailed read-out of
certain information. The Tooltip dialog defines which
information that will be shown.
If you press the right mouse button with the cursor
position within this view, a dedicated short-cut menu
will appear.
If you press the middle mouse button, the Single Target
Detection dialog will open.
Related topics
• Single Target Histogram short-cut menu on page 69
• Tooltip on page 91
• Single Target Detection on page 141
164692/D
57
Simrad EK60
Echogram view
The Echogram view will normally dominate each channel window on the echo sounder
display.
The echogram contains information
about the acoustical values. The
settings in the colour scale is used
to present the information. If you
place the cursor inside the view, a
small yellow label will appear to give
you a detailed read-out of certain
information. The Tooltip dialog
defines which information that will
be shown.
If you press the right mouse button
with the cursor position within this
view, a dedicated short-cut menu will
appear.
If you press the middle mouse button,
the Echogram dialog will open.
Related topics
• Echogram short-cut menu on
page 70
• Echogram on page 144
• Tooltip on page 91
(CD010012E)
58
164692/D
Display views
Scope view
The Scope view is normally located on the right side of the Echogram view.
The Scope view provides a logarithmic oscilloscope
visualization of the last ping. The presentation
corresponds to the current settings in the Echogram
view. The view draws a range of horizontal
symmetrical colour lines. The distance from the
vertical centre axis and the line colour reflects the
received echo scatter.
(CD010012F)
If you place the cursor inside the view, a small yellow
label will appear to give you a detailed read-out of
certain information. The Tooltip dialog defines which
information that will be shown.
If you press the right mouse button with the cursor
position within this view, a dedicated short-cut menu
will appear.
Related topics
• Scope short-cut menu on page 71
• Tooltip on page 91
164692/D
59
Simrad EK60
Colour scale view
The Colour scale view visualizes the mapping of echo
strength into one out of 12 colours, light blue for weak
signals and dark brown for strong signals. Basically,
each discrete colour represents a 3 dB range of echo
signal strength implying that the next colour is selected
every time the echo strength doubles. However, as
the number of colours can differ, and dedicated colour
schemes can be used, this is not necessarily correct.
A high numeric TVG value displays weak echo signals
properly while the stronger signals saturate into dark
brown colour. A low numeric value displays strong
echo signals properly. Weak signals below the lower
limit of the colour scale are not displayed (the display
background colour is used).
(CD010012G)
The Colour scale view is normally located on the left side of the Echogram view.
If you place the cursor inside the view, a small yellow
label will appear to give you a detailed read-out of
certain information. The Tooltip dialog defines which
information that will be shown.
If you press the right mouse button with the cursor
position within this view, a dedicated short-cut menu
will appear.
If you press the middle button, the Colour Scale dialog
opens.
Related topics
• Colour Scale short-cut menu on page 72
• Colour Scale on page 143
• Tooltip on page 91
60
164692/D
Display views
Numerical view
The Numerical view is normally located on the far right side of the display.
The Numerical view provides listing with all
the various parameters applicable for the current
mode and operation. The following lists are
available:
• Transducer: Typical specifications for the
active transducer
• Transceiver: Typical specifications for the
transceiver
• Environment: Displays the current read-out
from the active sensors
• Layers: Current parameters from the active
layers
If you press the right mouse button with the
cursor position within this view, a dedicated
short-cut menu will appear. On the short-cut
menu, you can open the Numerical View dialog,
which allows you to define the contents of the
Numerical view.
(CD010012H)
Related topics
• Numerical short-cut menu on page 73
• Numerical View on page 156
• Tooltip on page 91
164692/D
61
Simrad EK60
The menu system
The menu navigation employed by the Simrad EK60 is similar to other Windows-based
software. Main menu topics located in the menu bar at the top of the window provide
access to drop-down menus. Menu choices that are shown in grey are not available for
the current operation or operational mode.
Several parameters are also available using short-cut menus accessed by clicking the
right mouse button. For more specific menu information refer to the menu descriptions
listed below.
Topics
• Operation menu on page 63
• View menu on page 64
• Options menu on page 64
• Install menu on page 65
• Output menu on page 66
• Window menu on page 67
• Help menu on page 67
• Shortcut menus on page 68
62
164692/D
The menu system
Operation menu
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the Operation menu.
1
Normal (operation)
The purpose of the Normal
Operation dialog is to offer
you an overview of the
current transceiver parameters, and to provide you with the ability to change them.
→ Normal Operation on page 76
2
Replay
The purpose of the Replay dialog is to choose the file(s) to be used for playback.
The file names listed have been generated automatically during recording, and each
file is identified with the time and date it was made.
→ Replay on page 78
3
Ping Control
The dialog Ping Control is used to control the EK60 pinging during both normal
and replay operations.
→ Ping Control on page 80
4
Data Source
This Data Source dialog is used to set up the EK60 to be controlled from a peripheral
computer on the ship’s local area network. Any computer on the network running
the EK60 software can connect to the echo sounder computer and run the sounder
application independently.
→ Data Source on page 82
5
Log In
The Log In dialog allows you to log in as a user of the EK60 program. The user
name must exist on the computer for the log in to succeed.
→ Log In on page 84
6
Log Out
The Log Out dialog allows you to log out of the EK60 program.
→ Log Out on page 85
7
Exit
Use this option to close the EK60 application.
→ Exit on page 85
164692/D
63
Simrad EK60
View menu
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the View menu.
1
Toolbars
The Toolbars function allows you to show or hide the toolbars.
→ Toolbars on page 86
2
Status Bar
The Status Bar function allows you to show or hide the Status Bar.
→ Status Bar on page 87
Options menu
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the Options menu.
1
Colours
The purpose of the Colour
dialog is to control the
presentation colours used by the EK60.
→ Colours on page 89
2
Tooltip
The Tooltip dialog is used to select which information you wish to have displayed as
“tool tips” (information displayed next to the cursor) in the different views.
→ Tooltip on page 91
3
Calculation Interval
The Calculation Interval dialog allows you to define the time, number of pings, or
part of the echogram view used to calculate the biomass and the size distribution.
→ Calculation Interval on page 91
4
Local Time
The Local Time function is used to set the time display in the Status Bar to show
local or the GMT time included with the raw data recording.
→ Local Time on page 92
5
Load Settings
The Load Settings dialog is used to load previously saved operational settings.
→ Load Settings on page 93
64
164692/D
The menu system
6
Save Settings
The Save Settings dialog is save operational settings.
→ Save Settings on page 94
Install menu
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the Install menu.
1
Transceiver (Installation)
The purpose of the
Transceiver Installation
dialog is to set up the
necessary parameters to connect the EK60 computer to the transceiver(s) and the
transducer(s).
→ Transceiver Installation on page 96
2
Navigation
The Navigation dialog controls how the EK60 receives information from external
peripherals, such as navigation and gyro compass systems.
→ Navigation on page 101
3
Motion
The Motion dialog allows you to set up the EK60 to interface with an external
motion sensor.
→ Motion on page 107
4
Trawl
The Trawl dialog allows you to enter the main parameters related to the trawl. Trawl
information is used for display of upper and lower trawl line in the echogram. All
received speed data are stored to file when recording of raw data to file is enabled.
→ Trawl on page 109
5
Environment
The dialog Environment is used to adjust the environmental parameters. These
parameters are used for estimating range, propagation loss, and spreading loss, all
of which are essential concepts in the echo sounder.
→ Environment on page 110
6
Annotation
The purpose of the Annotations dialog is to allow you to enter comments and
annotations into the echograms.
→ Annotation on page 112
164692/D
65
Simrad EK60
7
Remoting
The Remoting dialog allows you to control the remotely controlled operation of the
EK60, both how the EK60 can be controlled from a peripheral system, and how the
EK60 can export information to this system.
→ Remoting on page 113
8
Users and Passwords
The Users and Passwords dialog is used to add and remove users, and to set and edit
user properties and passwords.
→ Users and Passwords on page 117
9
Port Management
The Port Management dialog allows you to control the properties of each of the
available communication channels on the EK60 computer.
→ Port Management on page 118
Output menu
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the Output menu.
1
File (Output)
The File Output dialog is used to specify which output you wish to save to a data
file, and in which disk directory the data file(s) shall be placed.
→ File Output on page 123
2
Ethernet (Output)
The purpose of the Ethernet Output dialog is to define the communication
parameters for the EK500 datagram output on the Ethernet port.
→ Ethernet Output on page 127
3
Depth (Output)
The Depth Output dialog is used to set up the output of depth data from the EK60 to
a dedicated communication port on a specified format.
→ Depth Output on page 128
66
164692/D
The menu system
Window menu
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the Window menu.
1
New Channel
The New Channel function
is used to display a new channel window. This can either be a new frequency
channel, or a new view of an existing frequency channel.
→ New Channel on page 132
2
Cascade
The Cascade function is used to place the open channel windows partly over each
other.
→ Cascade on page 133
3
Tile
The Tile function is used to display a new channel window. This can either be a new
frequency channel, or a new view of an existing frequency channel.
→ Tile on page 134
4
Open All
The Open All function is used to open all currently activated windows.
→ Open All on page 134
5
Close All
The Close All function is used to close all open channel windows.
→ Close All on page 135
Help menu
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the Help menu.
1
Contents
Use the Contents function option to open the first page of the context sensitive
on-line help system.
→ Contents on page 136
2
About ER60
The About dialog allows you to see the current EK60 software version.
→ Status Bar on page 87
164692/D
67
Simrad EK60
Shortcut menus
The following functions and parameters are available from the short-cut menus.
The short-cut menus are opened by clicking the right mouse button when the cursor is
located in any of the views. Various menus are provided depending on the current view.
To make a choice, click on the menu name and observe the drop-down menu. Select a
new item on the drop-down menu by clicking the relevant option.
Topics
• Depth short-cut menu on page 68
• Single Target Position short-cut menu on page 69
• Single Target Histogram short-cut menu on page 69
• Echogram short-cut menu on page 70
• Scope short-cut menu on page 71
• Colour Scale short-cut menu on page 72
• Numerical short-cut menu on page 73
Depth short-cut menu
The Depth short-cut menu allows you to control the properties
of the Depth view. It also provides common functionality
related to printing and window configuration.
1 Bottom Detection
The purpose of the Bottom Detection dialog is to define
the upper and lower depth limits most likely to be used
during the EK60 operation. In this dialog, you can also modify the setting for
Backstep Min. Level to change the bottom detection relative to the bottom echo.
→ Bottom Detection on page 140
2
Print
The Print dialog allows you to print the current view.
→ Print on page 156
3
Print Preview
The Print Preview dialog allows you check the printout before you send the job
to the printer.
→ Print Preview on page 157
4
Configure Window
The Configure Window dialog is used to define which views to show in the active
window.
→ Configure Window on page 158
5
Hide View
The Hide View function hides the view from which the command was chosen.
→ Hide View on page 158
68
164692/D
The menu system
Single Target Position short-cut menu
The Single Target Position short-cut menu allows you to
control the properties of the Single Target Position view.
It also provides common functionality related to printing
and window configuration.
1
Single Target Detection
The Single Target Detection dialog is used to set the
operational parameters for detecting single targets.
→ Single Target Detection on page 141
2
Colour Scale
The purpose of the Colour Scale dialog is to change the dynamic range of the colour
scale.
→ Colour Scale on page 143
3
Print
The Print dialog allows you to print the current view.
→ Print on page 156
4
Print Preview
The Print Preview dialog allows you check the printout before you send the job
to the printer.
→ Print Preview on page 157
5
Configure Window
The Configure Window dialog is used to define which views to show in the active
window.
→ Configure Window on page 158
6
Hide View
The Hide View function hides the view from which the command was chosen.
→ Hide View on page 158
Single Target Histogram short-cut menu
The Single Target Histogram short-cut menu allows you to
control the properties of the Single Target Histogram view.
It also provides common functionality related to printing
and window configuration.
1
Histogram
This Histogram dialog is used to set parameters for the
histogram displayed in the Single Target Histogram
view.
→ Histogram on page 144
164692/D
69
Simrad EK60
2
Single Target Detection
The Single Target Detection dialog is used to set the operational parameters for
detecting single targets.
→ Single Target Detection on page 141
3
Colour Scale
The purpose of the Colour Scale dialog is to change the dynamic range of the colour
scale.
→ Colour Scale on page 143
4
Print
The Print dialog allows you to print the current view.
→ Print on page 156
5
Print Preview
The Print Preview dialog allows you check the printout before you send the job
to the printer.
→ Print Preview on page 157
6
Configure Window
The Configure Window dialog is used to define which views to show in the active
window.
→ Configure Window on page 158
7
Hide View
The Hide View function hides the view from which the command was chosen.
→ Hide View on page 158
Echogram short-cut menu
The Echogram short-cut menu allows you to control the
properties of the Echogram view. It also provides common
functionality related to printing and window configuration.
1
Echogram
The Echogram dialog allows you to set up the parameters
controlling the echogram presentation. The three tabs
control the horizontal lines, the echogram type with
applied TVG, and how sample data are converted to pixel
data.
→ Echogram on page 144
2
Horizontal Axis
This Horizontal Axis dialog is used to set the horizontal display span of the
Echogram view.
→ Horizontal Axis on page 148
70
164692/D
The menu system
3
Range
The Bottom Range dialog is used to specify the vertical depth range for the
Echogram view in bottom related echograms.
The Surface Range dialog is used to specify the vertical depth range for the
Echogram view in surface related echograms.
→ Bottom Range on page 149
→ Surface Range on page 151
4
New layer
The New Layer dialog is used to insert a new vertical layer.
→ New Layer on page 152
5
Layer Properties
The Layer Properties dialog is used to edit the properties for the active layer.
→ Layer Properties on page 154
6
Delete Layer
The Delete Layer function is used to delete the active (selected) layer in the view.
The layer is identified with red text in the Numerical view.
→ Delete Layer on page 155
7
Print
The Print dialog allows you to print the current view.
→ Print on page 156
8
Print Preview
The Print Preview dialog allows you check the printout before you send the job
to the printer.
→ Print Preview on page 157
9
Configure Window
The Configure Window dialog is used to define which views to show in the active
window.
→ Configure Window on page 158
10 Hide View
The Hide View function hides the view from which the command was chosen.
→ Hide View on page 158
Scope short-cut menu
The Scope short-cut menu provides common functionality
related to printing and window configuration.
1 Print
The Print dialog allows you to print the current view.
→ Print on page 156
164692/D
71
Simrad EK60
2
Print Preview
The Print Preview dialog allows you check the printout before you send the job
to the printer.
→ Print Preview on page 157
3
Configure Window
The Configure Window dialog is used to define which views to show in the active
window.
→ Configure Window on page 158
4
Hide View
The Hide View function hides the view from which the command was chosen.
→ Hide View on page 158
Colour Scale short-cut menu
The Colour Scale short-cut menu allows you to control the
properties of the Colour Scale view. It also provides common
functionality related to printing and window configuration.
1
Colour Scale
The purpose of the Colour Scale dialog is to change the
dynamic range of the colour scale.
→ Colour Scale on page 143
2
Print
The Print dialog allows you to print the current view.
→ Print on page 156
3
Print Preview
The Print Preview dialog allows you check the printout before you send the job
to the printer.
→ Print Preview on page 157
4
Configure Window
The Configure Window dialog is used to define which views to show in the active
window.
→ Configure Window on page 158
5
Hide View
The Hide View function hides the view from which the command was chosen.
→ Hide View on page 158
72
164692/D
The menu system
Numerical short-cut menu
The Numerical short-cut menu allows you to control the
properties of the Numerical view and the current layers. It also
provides common functionality related to printing and window
configuration.
1
Numerical View
The Numerical View dialog is used to select which
information is displayed in the Numerical view.
→ Numerical View on page 156
2
New layer
The New Layer dialog is used to insert a new vertical layer.
→ New Layer on page 152
3
Layer Properties
The Layer Properties dialog is used to edit the properties for the active layer.
→ Layer Properties on page 154
4
Delete Layer
The Delete Layer function is used to delete the active (selected) layer in the view.
The layer is identified with red text in the Numerical view.
→ Delete Layer on page 155
5
Print
The Print dialog allows you to print the current view.
→ Print on page 156
6
Print Preview
The Print Preview dialog allows you check the printout before you send the job
to the printer.
→ Print Preview on page 157
7
Configure Window
The Configure Window dialog is used to define which views to show in the active
window.
→ Configure Window on page 158
8
Hide View
The Hide View function hides the view from which the command was chosen.
→ Hide View on page 158
164692/D
73
Simrad EK60
Functions and dialogs
This chapter presents a detailed description of each function and dialog used by the
EK60. Whenever applicable, references are made to the Operational procedure chapter.
You do not need to have an in-depth knowledge of these dialogs to use the EK60. The
information in this chapter is for reference only.
Topics
• Operation menu; functions and dialogs on page 75
• View menu; functions and dialogs on page 86
• Options menu; functions and dialogs on page 89
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
• Output menu; functions and dialogs on page 123
• Window menu; functions and dialogs on page 132
• Help menu; functions and dialogs on page 136
• Short-cut menus; functions and dialogs on page 138
• Secondary functions and dialogs on page 159
74
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Operation menu; functions and dialogs
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the Operation menu.
1
Normal (operation)
The purpose of the Normal
Operation dialog is to offer
you an overview of the
current transceiver parameters, and to provide you with the ability to change them.
→ Normal Operation on page 76
2
Replay
The purpose of the Replay dialog is to choose the file(s) to be used for playback.
The file names listed have been generated automatically during recording, and each
file is identified with the time and date it was made.
→ Replay on page 78
3
Ping Control
The dialog Ping Control is used to control the EK60 pinging during both normal
and replay operations.
→ Ping Control on page 80
4
Data Source
This Data Source dialog is used to set up the EK60 to be controlled from a peripheral
computer on the ship’s local area network. Any computer on the network running
the EK60 software can connect to the echo sounder computer and run the sounder
application independently.
→ Data Source on page 82
5
Log In
The Log In dialog allows you to log in as a user of the EK60 program. The user
name must exist on the computer for the log in to succeed.
→ Log In on page 84
6
Log Out
The Log Out dialog allows you to log out of the EK60 program.
→ Log Out on page 85
7
Exit
Use this option to close the EK60 application.
→ Exit on page 85
164692/D
75
Simrad EK60
Normal Operation
The Normal Operation dialog is opened from the Operation menu.
Purpose
The purpose of the Normal Operation dialog is to offer you an overview of the current
transceiver parameters, and to provide you with the ability to change them.
Description
The Normal Operation dialog lists all the main parameters for the transceiver(s). The
dialog provides one row (line) for each transceiver in use. You are permitted to change
the parameters, but we will advise you not to do any changes unless you are well aware
of the consequences.
Parameters
1
Channel
This column specifies which transceiver(s) you are using. The text string provides
the following information:
• Transceiver ID
• Transceiver's IP address
• Transducer name
2
Mode
This column specifies the current transceiver mode. You can manually select a mode.
a
Active
The transmitter and receiver are both active (normal operation).
b
Passive
The transmitter is passive while the receiver is active.
The EK60 will receive and compute the signals detected by the transducer(s).
This mode is thus useful for test purposes, and when you wish to measure the
ambient background noise in the sea. It can also be useful to run the EK60 in
Passive mode to discriminate between target echoes (present only in Active
mode) and noise (present in both Active and Passive modes).
76
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Tip
If you wish to investigate the ambient noise, choose Passive mode in the
Normal Operation dialog. Any noise or disturbance in the water – within the
transducer's frequency range – will then be detected and shown. This feature
will for example be able to pick up disturbances from other hydroacoustic
systems on your own vessel, or on other vessels in the vicinity.
c
Test
The transmitter is passive while the receiver is active.
Each General Purpose Transceiver (GPT) board includes a signal generator
injecting a weak test signal (-70.0 dBW) into the receiver’s input circuitry. The
nominal power reading at the display is -70.0 dBW for channels using one
transceiver board (1 kW single beam) and -64.0 dBW for channels using four
boards (4 kW single beam, 4 kW split beam).
Note that this feature is disabled on some high-frequent transceivers in order
to improve the performance.
3
Pulse duration / Sample interval / Bandwidth
These parameters are interdependent, and can not be changed individually. However,
for each transceiver channel you may choose from a set of parameter groups.
The pulse duration parameter controls the duration of the transmit pulse. The table
below shows the pulse duration (given in μS) available for the different operational
frequencies.
Table 4
Pulse duration
kHz
64
128
256
512
1024
2048
4096
8192
16384
12
—
—
—
—
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
18
—
—
—
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
—
38
—
—
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
—
—
70
—
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
—
—
—
120
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
—
—
—
—
200
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
—
—
—
—
X-axis is pulse duration in μS, Y-axis is frequency in kHz. “OK” means that the pulse duration
is available for the given frequency.
Tip
The length of your transmitted pulse is very important to how you can detect fish.
• A short pulse duration gives you a very fine vertical resolution. This allows you
to detect scattered fish, and you can find those that move near the bottom.
• A longer pulse duration will provide longer range, but reduced vertical resolution.
164692/D
77
Simrad EK60
4
Power
This parameter displays and controls the transmitter’s output power. Output power
is limited either to the maximum rating of the transducer, or the maximum rating of
the transmitter, whichever is the smallest.
5
Depth
This is the depth of the transducer face relative to the water surface.
In order to measure correct water depth, the EK60 needs to know the vertical
distance between the vessel’s water line and the acoustic face of each transducer.
The depth of each individual transducer must be defined manually. Enter the depth
as a positive number.
Example 2
Transducer depth
If the distance from the water line and down to the transducer face is 3,5
meters, enter +3,5 m.
Multiplexer operation
When the EK60 Scientific echo sounder is operated with a multiplexer, both transceiver
channels are shown in the Normal Operation dialog.
In this mode, you are permitted to change transducer depth, pulse duration, sample
interval and bandwidth for the second transducer, but you can not changed the mode
and power output.
Related topics
• Operation menu; functions and dialogs on page 75
• Output power on page 231
• Pulse duration on page 233
Replay
The Replay dialog is opened from the Operation menu.
Purpose
The purpose of the Replay dialog is to choose the file(s) to be used for playback. The
file names listed have been generated automatically during recording, and each file is
identified with the time and date it was made.
78
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Description
The EK60 is provided with a few
example files for playback. You
can also create files by means of the
recording function on the EK60.
The dialog allows you to add one or
more files to a the list of active files
for playback. You can click Loop to
have a continuous playback with the
file(s) you have chosen.
To delete a file from the playback list, simply click the file name, and then the Remove
button. The file is removed from the list, but not from the hard disk.
Parameters
1
Files
This list displays the currently selected echogram files installed for playback.
2
Add
Click this button to add additional file(s) to the playback list. A standard operating
system dialog opens to choose files.
3
Remove
Click on a file in the playback list, then click this button to remove the file from the
list. The file is removed from the list, but not from the hard disk.
Tip
If you wish to remove a playback file from your hard disk, you need to use an
operating system file utility.
4
Loop
Check this box if you want the EK60 program to loop through the currently selected
replay files without stopping.
Related topics
• Recording raw data on page 28
• Play back raw data on page 29
164692/D
79
Simrad EK60
Ping Control
The Ping Control dialog is opened from the Operation menu.
Purpose
The dialog Ping Control is used to control the EK60 pinging during both normal and
replay operations.
Description
All settings in this dialog take
immediate action. Note that
the majority of operations
carried out in this dialog can
also me made on the toolbar.
• In Maximum mode, click
the Start button to start
pinging. This operation
will toggle the button text to Stop, which you can click to stop pinging.
• In Interval mode, set the interval time in the spin box, and use the Start / Stop button
to initiate the pinging.
• In Single step mode, click the Single step button on the Easy operation toolbar to
transmit a single ping.
Parameters
1 Start / Stop
Click this button to start or stop the pinging in Maximum and Interval modes.
2 Single step
Click this button to transmit one single ping in Single step mode.
3 Ping rate
The Ping rate can be set to either Maximum, Single step, or Interval.
a Maximum
This option allows the EK60 to transmit at maximum speed.
The ping interval is basically only limited by the maximum depth range.
It will also be dependant on hardware issues. This may be, for example, how
fast your computer can handle the information from each ping, how fast your
system communicates with external peripherals, or how long time the system
uses to save data. The ping rate can also be reduced by the transceiver if it is
unable to charge the transmission capacitors fast enough, a shorter pulse length
may then increase the ping rate.
80
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Numerous parameter settings on your EK60 system may also reduce the ping
rate. If the ping rate is slow, you should check if the bottom detection settings
are set to match the actual depth. If you export depth data, you must also check
that these parameters match the current depth.
b
Single step
This option allows the EK60 to transmit single pings.
To transmit a single ping, click the button on the Easy operation toolbar.
If you have a keyboard connected to your EK60, you can also use the keyboard
combination Alt+S.
c
Interval
This option allows the EK60 to transmit once every chosen time interval.
The time interval (in seconds) is chosen in the spin box.
4
Triggering
The echo sounder can be set up to either supply trigger to a remote system, or be
triggered by external instruments. Note that triggering is only available in the
Normal ping mode.
a
Ingoing
Check this box to be triggered by an external instrument. The ping transmission
will be delayed until a pulse is detected at the source. Select the source using
the list box.
b
Outgoing
Check this box to generate an output signal at the selected source each time
a ping is transmitted. Use the list box to select the output where the trigger
signal will appear.
The external triggering system is explained in more detail in the Instruction manual.
Refer to the Cable layout chapter.
164692/D
81
Simrad EK60
Data Source
The Data Source dialog is opened from the Operation menu. The functions provided are
only applicable on peripheral computers that are remotely connected to the EK60 system
computer (server) using the ship’s local area network (LAN).
Purpose
This Data Source dialog is used to set up the EK60 to be controlled from a peripheral
computer on the ship’s local area network. Any computer on the network running
the EK60 software can connect to the echo sounder computer and run the sounder
application independently.
Description
The Data Source dialog is only applicable on peripheral computers that are remotely
connected to the EK60 system computer (server) using the ship’s local area network
(LAN). The dialog displays a list of echo sounder programs running on the network to
which the peripheral computer is connected.
If the computer is not connected to other echo sounder programs, the list will only
contain one entry; *Local. This single entry is the echo sounder program running on
computer. Once an EK60 Processor Unit with its transceiver(s) is connected to the
network, and enabled for remote control using the Remoting dialog, it will be visible.
The EK60 Processor Unit is then regarded as a server on the network.
You will not be able to perform installation operations (e.g. transceiver and sensor
installation) on other computers than the EK60 Processor Unit (server).
To perform operations on an entry in the list, the entry must be highlighted (selected). To
do this, click once on the entry to select it.
82
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Parameters
1
Name
This column displays the installation name of the echo sounder program entry.
An asterisk (*) in front of an entry means that this entry is currently selected data
source. Only one entry can be selected at a time. The installation name is defined
in the Remoting dialog.
2
Description
This column displays a short description of this program. The description is also
defined in the Remoting dialog.
3
IP address
This column displays the IP address of the computer running the echo sounder
program.
4
Logged in
This column displays if the you are logged in to this echo sounder program entry.
5
User name
This column displays the user name to be used when logging in to the program. The
user name must exist on the remote application for the log in to succeed. For more
information on adding users refer to the Remoting dialog.
6
Access level
This column displays the access level for the user name.
7
Change user:
Click this button to change the user name used when logging in to the selected entry.
Once pressed, the Users and Passwords dialog opens.
8
Log in
Click this button to log in to the selected entry.
9
Log out
Click this button to log out from the selected entry.
10 Select
Click this button to define the selected (highlighted) entry as the current data source.
Related topics
• Remoting on page 113
• Log In on page 84
• Log Out on page 85
• Users and Passwords on page 117
164692/D
83
Simrad EK60
Log In
The Log In dialog is opened from the Operation menu. The dialog will also appear
automatically when you switch on the echo sounder.
Purpose
The Log In dialog allows you to log in as a user of the EK60 program. The user name
must exist on the computer for the log in to succeed.
Description
Enter user name and password. Click to enable
Auto login if you want to log in automatically
when the sounder software is started, and thus
bypass this dialog.
Parameters
1
User name
This is the name used to identify the person that wishes to use the echo sounder
application.
2
Password
This is a code string used to verify that the person who wishes to use the echo
sounder is the correct user.
3
Auto login
When this check box is enabled, the log in process is disabled. Any person will then
be able to use the echo sounder application.
Related topics
• Log Out on page 85
• Users and Passwords on page 117
84
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Log Out
The Log Out function is opened from the Operation menu.
Purpose
The Log Out dialog allows you to log out of the EK60 program.
Description
Click Operation →Log Out.
Related topics
• Log In on page 84
• Users and Passwords on page 117
Exit
The Exit function is activated from the Operation menu.
Purpose
Use this option to close the EK60 application.
Description
Click File →Exit.
Note that when you exit the EK60, the program closes down just like any other standard
application. You can restart the EK60 by double-clicking on the desktop icon.
164692/D
85
Simrad EK60
View menu; functions and dialogs
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the View menu.
1 Toolbars
The Toolbars function allows you to show or hide the toolbars.
→ Toolbars on page 86
2
Status Bar
The Status Bar function allows you to show or hide the Status Bar.
→ Status Bar on page 87
Toolbars
The Toolbars function is opened from the View menu.
Purpose
The Toolbars function allows you to show or hide the toolbars.
Description
This is simply an “on/off” switch to show or hide the toolbars.
You can choose to open the Normal Operation or the Easy Operation toolbar, or both.
When enabled, the toolbar(s) will appear directly below or next to the main menu.
1 Click View →Toolbars →Normal Operation to enable the Normal Operation toolbar.
2 Click View →Toolbars →Easy Operation to enable the Easy Operation toolbar.
To remove a toolbar, repeat the sequence.
The functions (from left) provided by the two toolbars - and the equivalent dialog buttons
and controls - are listed in the two tables below.
Table 5
Easy operation toolbar
Tool bar button
Equivalent
Dialog
Start pinging [►]
Start
Ping control
Perform single ping [►1]
Single step
Ping control
Stop pinging [●]
Stop
Ping control
Set ping rate
Ping rate
Ping control
Start raw data recording [►]
Start recording
File output
Stop raw data recording [●]
Stop recording
File output
Initiate annotation [A]
Annotation text input
Annotation
Generate event [E]
Annotation text input
Annotation
86
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Table 6
Normal operation toolbar
Tool bar button
Equivalent
Dialog
Select channel
—
—
Select mode
Mode
Normal Operation
Parameters
1 Easy Operation
Click to enable or disable the Easy Operation toolbar.
2
Normal Operation
Click to enable or disable the Normal Operation toolbar.
Important
The Normal operation toolbar is not available during replay.
Related topics
• Toolbars on page 52
• Annotation on page 112
• Normal Operation on page 76
• File Output on page 123
Status Bar
The Status Bar function is opened from the View menu.
Purpose
The Status Bar function allows you to show or hide the Status Bar.
Description
This is simply an “on/off” switch to show or hide the Status Bar. When enabled, the
Status Bar will appear at the bottom of the EK60 presentation.
When all information has been enabled, and if the relevant sensors have been connected
to the EK60, the Status Bar will provide the following information (from left):
• Current messages
• Current vessel pitch in degrees
164692/D
87
Simrad EK60
• Current vessel roll in degrees
• Current vessel heave in meters
• Event number
• Current heading
• Current vessel speed in knots
• Distance in nautical miles or meters
• Geographical position
• Recording status
• Date and time
Choose to display local or GMT time using the Local Time function on the Options
menu.
• Warning messages
The Warnings field on the far right side of the status bar is a button. When a warning
has been issued, the button will be lit with a colour and a text indicating the nature of
the message. To investigate further, click the button.
Parameters
This is an “on/off” switch.
Related topics
• Status Bar on page 53
• Local Time on page 92
• Configure Statusbar on page 161
• Errors on page 164
• Warnings on page 165
88
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Options menu; functions and dialogs
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the Options menu.
1
Colours
The purpose of the Colour
dialog is to control the
presentation colours used by the EK60.
→ Colours on page 89
2
Tooltip
The Tooltip dialog is used to select which information you wish to have displayed as
“tool tips” (information displayed next to the cursor) in the different views.
→ Tooltip on page 91
3
Calculation Interval
The Calculation Interval dialog allows you to define the time, number of pings, or
part of the echogram view used to calculate the biomass and the size distribution.
→ Calculation Interval on page 91
4
Local Time
The Local Time function is used to set the time display in the Status Bar to show
local or the GMT time included with the raw data recording.
→ Local Time on page 92
5
Load Settings
The Load Settings dialog is used to load previously saved operational settings.
→ Load Settings on page 93
6
Save Settings
The Save Settings dialog is save operational settings.
→ Save Settings on page 94
Colours
The Colours dialog is opened from the Options menu.
Purpose
The purpose of the Colour dialog is to control the presentation colours used by the EK60.
164692/D
89
Simrad EK60
Description
The Colour Setup dialog provides three
fields.
• The No. of Colours field allows you
to choose how many colours you wish
to use.
• The Colour Scale field allows you to
choose which colour scale to use.
• The Palette field is used to select the overall colour theme used by the EK60
presentation.
Do not confuse this dialog with the Colour Scale dialog!
Parameters
1 No. of Colours
Set the number of colours to use in the display presentations, 12 or 64.
2 Colour Scale
When 64 colours are used, you can select the desired colour scale to be used on
the EK60 presentations.
Which colour scale to use is mainly a personal preference based on ambient light
conditions, the nature of the echoes and experience.
12 colours
Sonar colours (64)
Echosounder
colours (64)
Grayscale (64)
BI500 colours
(64)
The Echosounder colours scale is based on the standard 12-colour scale, but additional colours
have been added between these to make smoother colour transitions.
3
Palette
The choice you make here does not have any effect on the EK60 performance.
The options are:
• Day White
• Dusk
• Night
• Night Unfiltered
Note that you can also change the colour palette by right-clicking on the Windows
desktop, and then selecting Properties on the short-cut menu. This will open the
standard Display Properties dialog, and you can make your choices on the Themes
tab. If you then enable a new palette from the EK60 Colours dialog, this choice will
override the operating system setting.
Related topics
• Options menu; functions and dialogs on page 89
90
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
• Colour Scale on page 143
Tooltip
The Tooltip dialog is opened from the Options menu.
Purpose
The Tooltip dialog is used to select which information you wish to have displayed as
“tool tips” (information displayed next to the cursor) in the different views.
Description
Click Options →Tooltip, and
make the necessary changes.
Each view has its own set
of parameters which can be
switched on or off.
Related topics
• Colour scale view on
page 60
• Depth view on page 55
• Echogram view on page 58
• Single target histogram view on page 57
• Single target position view on page 56
• Scope view on page 59
• Options menu; functions and dialogs on page 89
Calculation Interval
The Calculation Interval dialog is opened from the Options menu.
Purpose
The Calculation Interval dialog allows you to define the time, number of pings, or part of
the echogram view used to calculate the biomass and the size distribution.
164692/D
91
Simrad EK60
Description
The biomass and size distribution values
are calculated based on the echo data
collected by the EK60.
Using the Calculation Interval
functionality, you can limit the source
data used by these calculations. You
can thus specify if you wish to base the
calculations on data collected during a give timeframe, from a defined number of pings,
or from the data used to create a portion of the current echogram view.
A vertical line is displayed in the echogram views whenever a new calculation interval
is started.
Parameters
1 Distance
Check this box to perform calculations based on sailed distance.
Select distance interval in the spin box. Select distance units (nautical miles or
meters) in the drop-down menu.
2 Time
This option allows you to calculate the biomass and fish distribution based on the
echo data collected during the last elapsed seconds or minutes.
You can select any time (in minutes and seconds) up to 200 minutes, but limited
to the latest 3000 pings.
3 Ping
This option allows you to calculate the biomass and fish distribution based on the
echo data collected during the last pings.
You can choose up to maximum 1000 pings.
Related topics
• Numerical view on page 61
• Options menu; functions and dialogs on page 89
Local Time
The Local Time function is accessed from the Options menu.
Purpose
The Local Time function is used to set the time display in the Status Bar to show local
or the GMT time included with the raw data recording.
92
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Description
Whenever raw data is recorded, the GMT time of the recording is included in the files. In
addition to that, an offset value is recorded. This offset identifies the difference between
the GMT time and the local time shown on the EK60 computer during the recording.
During playback, you can choose if you wish to see the time of recording (GMT) or
the local time in the Status Bar.
For the local time to be correct the computer clock provided by the operating system
must be set up correctly.
Note that older raw data files may not contain the offset information.
Related topics
• Status Bar on page 53
• Options menu; functions and dialogs on page 89
Load Settings
The Load Settings dialog is opened from the Options menu.
Purpose
The Load Settings dialog is used to load previously saved operational settings.
Description
Program settings can be saved to files. This dialog
displays a list of previously saved setting files.
These files are located in the directory displayed
in the File Path box. Note that installation settings
(e.g. Transceiver and sensor installation settings)
are not saved in the settings files.
Click Options →Load Settings. Select a setting file
by clicking once on the file name, then click OK.
Parameters
1
File name
This box lists the current setting file by their
file names.
2
File path
This box displays the path (location on the hard disk) of the currently selected
setting file.
164692/D
93
Simrad EK60
3
Delete File
Select a setting file, then click this button to delete the file from the hard disk.
Related topics
• Options menu; functions and dialogs on page 89
• Save Settings on page 94
Save Settings
The Save Settings dialog is opened from the Options menu.
Purpose
The Save Settings dialog is save operational settings.
Description
Click Options →Save Settings. Type a name for
the file to contain the current settings, then click
OK.
To load previously saved user setting, use the
Load Settings dialog.
Parameters
1
File name
This field allows you to enter a file name. The name is used to identify the settings.
Related topics
• Options menu; functions and dialogs on page 89
• Load Settings on page 93
94
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Install menu; functions and dialogs
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the Install menu.
1
Transceiver (Installation)
The purpose of the
Transceiver Installation
dialog is to set up the
necessary parameters to connect the EK60 computer to the transceiver(s) and the
transducer(s).
→ Transceiver Installation on page 96
2
Navigation
The Navigation dialog controls how the EK60 receives information from external
peripherals, such as navigation and gyro compass systems.
→ Navigation on page 101
3
Motion
The Motion dialog allows you to set up the EK60 to interface with an external
motion sensor.
→ Motion on page 107
4
Trawl
The Trawl dialog allows you to enter the main parameters related to the trawl. Trawl
information is used for display of upper and lower trawl line in the echogram. All
received speed data are stored to file when recording of raw data to file is enabled.
→ Trawl on page 109
5
Environment
The dialog Environment is used to adjust the environmental parameters. These
parameters are used for estimating range, propagation loss, and spreading loss, all
of which are essential concepts in the echo sounder.
→ Environment on page 110
6
Annotation
The purpose of the Annotations dialog is to allow you to enter comments and
annotations into the echograms.
→ Annotation on page 112
7
Remoting
The Remoting dialog allows you to control the remotely controlled operation of the
EK60, both how the EK60 can be controlled from a peripheral system, and how the
EK60 can export information to this system.
→ Remoting on page 113
164692/D
95
Simrad EK60
8
Users and Passwords
The Users and Passwords dialog is used to add and remove users, and to set and edit
user properties and passwords.
→ Users and Passwords on page 117
9
Port Management
The Port Management dialog allows you to control the properties of each of the
available communication channels on the EK60 computer.
→ Port Management on page 118
Transceiver Installation
The Transceiver Installation dialog is opened from the Install menu.
Purpose
The purpose of the Transceiver Installation dialog is to set up the necessary parameters to
connect the EK60 computer to the transceiver(s) and the transducer(s).
Description
This dialog controls installation
and disconnection of
transceivers. Every time
this dialog is opened, the
EK60 software automatically
performs a search on
the Ethernet network for
transceivers. You can also
initiate a search by clicking the
Browse button. To connect to
an available frequency channel,
select the correct transducer
on an available channel.
The dialog provides the following main parameter fields:
a Channel list on page 97
b Transceiver information on page 98
c Transducer Selection on page 98
d Multiplexer Installation on page 99
e Transceiver browsing on page 99
96
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Tip
On the EK60, the parameters related to transmission and transducer depth are controlled
in the Normal Operation dialog.
→ Normal Operation on page 76
Each transceiver contains one or more frequency channels.
This phrase is used to identify the combination of a transceiver, transducers and the
frequencies offered. Split beam transceivers contain only one channel each.
The upper part of the Transceiver Installation dialog displays a list of frequency channels
which either are, or have been, installed on the EK60. For each channel on the list,
a colour coded text is provided.
The following status values are available in the Transceiver Installation dialog.
• Entries shown in black are detected frequency channels which are not installed, but
available for installation.
• Entries shown in green are detected frequency channels, which are both detected
and installed.
• Entries shown in blue are detected frequency channels which are installed by another
echo sounder program, and thus not available for this application.
• Entries shown in red are frequency channels which have previously been installed,
but are no longer available.
Note
It is very important that you set up the EK60 to operate with the correct transducer(s).
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
• Normal Operation on page 76
• Transducer Parameters on page 172
Channel list
The purpose of the channel list is to provide you with an overview of the frequency
channels currently available.
164692/D
97
Simrad EK60
Parameters
1
Frequency Channel Selection
a
Transceiver type
This is the type of transceiver currently available on the network.
GPT means General Purpose Transceiver.
b
Frequency
This is the operational frequency of the transceiver.
c
Ethernet address
This is the Ethernet address of the transceiver. This address is fixed, and it can
not be changed.
d
Number of channels
e
Transducer type
Transceiver information
If you click one of the frequency channels in the channel list, additional information
about the relevant transceiver is provided.
The purpose of the transceiver information field is to provide you with an overview of
the technical parameters of the chosen frequency channel.
Note that information provided here is not required for operational use.
Parameters
1
Name
The currently selected frequency channel.
2
GPT SW Version
The current software version in the General Purpose Transceiver (GPT).
3
Console IP Address
The IP address of the console running the echo sounder software.
4
Network IP Address
Describes which numbers must be identical between the console IP address and the
transceiver IP address for the transceiver to be identified by the console. Thus,
the address 157.237.xxx.xxx describes that all transceiver IP addresses must start
with 157.237.
5
GPT IP Address
The IP address of the General Purpose Transceiver (GPT).
Transducer Selection
The purpose of this function is to choose which transducer to connect to the chosen
transceiver.
98
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Parameters
1
Transducer
The left spin-box is not used on the General Purpose
Transceiver (GPT).
The right spin-box is used to select transducer.
The transducer must be registered in the EK60
software to appear on this list. If you can not find
your transducer on the list, contact you dealer to upgrade the relevant software
component on the EK60.
2
Transducer parameters
Transducer parameters are normally automatically updated through the calibration
procedure, and do not need to be changed manually. You can however manually
modify transducer parameters using the Transducer Parameters dialog. Click this
button to access the dialog.
→ Transducer Parameters on page 172
Multiplexer Installation
The purpose of this function is to set up the EK60 to work with a transducer multiplexer.
The dedicated multiplexer unit allows two or four transducers to be connected to the
transceiver. Three different operational modes are available.
Parameters
1
Multiplexer Installation
Use the drop-down selector to choose mode.
• None: Basic mode for normal operation with
one single transducer
• Mux-2: Multiplexer mode with two transducers
When you enable multiplexer operation, the information about the General Purpose
Transceiver (GPT) is changed to the trlist.ini file. In order to use this
information, the echo sounder application must be restarted.
Transceiver browsing
The Browser parameters are used when you wish to start an automatic search for
transceivers on the network. The communication is made between your computer
(identified with its Local IP Address) and one or more transceivers.
To search your network for transceivers, check that the IP address of your computer's
Ethernet board is shown, and click the Browse button. All transceivers connected to
the computer through the network are automatically listed in the channel list. Each
transceiver is identified with its applicable status label.
164692/D
99
Simrad EK60
Parameters
1
Local IP Address
This is the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the local Ethernet interface board. If
you have more than one interface board, you are provided with a list of the available
addresses.
Important
The Ethernet board used to communicate with the EK60 transceiver(s) must be set
up in the same address range as the transceiver(s).
Use the following Internet Protocol (IP) addresses on the computer’s Ethernet board:
IP Address: 157.237.15.12
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
If you have more than one Ethernet board in your computer, set up one to
communicate with the transceiver(s) using the IP address and Subnet mask shown,
and one to communicate with another local area network. You must use the
operating system’s functionality to set up these IP addresses.
2
Remote IP Address
Select the Internet Protocol (IP) address for the remote transceiver.
If you wish to locate a transceiver using Point-to-Point communication, enter the
Internet Protocol (IP) address for the transceiver.
If you don’t know the transceiver’s IP address, leave this field blank, and use
Broadcast communication.
3
Communication mode
Choose Broadcast or Point-to-Point.
Use Broadcast if you do not know the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the
transceiver.
Use Point-to-Point if you know the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the transceiver.
You must then enter the transceiver’s IP address into the Remote IP Address field.
4
Browse
This button initiates a search on the network for available transceivers. The
transceivers that are found are automatically listed in the channel list with their
appropriate statuses.
100
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Navigation
The Navigation dialog is opened from the Install menu.
Purpose
The Navigation dialog controls how the EK60 receives information from external
peripherals, such as navigation and gyro compass systems.
Description
Several external sensors (GPS navigation, gyro compass etc.) can be connected to the
EK60 to provide information about the vessel's speed, position, heading and sailed
distance. The EK60 must be set up to receive this information. The interface ports must
be defined, and the format of the information must be selected. The Navigation dialog
provides dedicated tabs to set up these parameters.
1
Position: Set up interface port and parameters for input from positioning system
(typically a GPS system).
2
Speed: Set up interface port and parameters for input from speed log.
3
Distance: Set up interface port and parameters for input from distance log.
4
Heading: Set up interface port and parameters for input from a heading sensor,
for example a gyro compass.
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
• LAN Port Setup on page 168
• Serial Port Setup on page 169
• About the NMEA telegram format on page 174
• Telegram formats on page 174
164692/D
101
Simrad EK60
Navigation; Position tab
The parameters on this
Navigation tab allows you
to control the interface with
external positioning sensors.
These are typically GPS
systems providing their data on
a serial line or by means of the
local area network.
The information from the GPS
system provides the position
information on the EK60 Status
bar.
Parameters
1
Port
Select which serial or Ethernet port to use for this communication.
2
Setup
Once you have selected a serial or Ethernet communication port, click this button to
set up the applicable port parameters. The relevant port setup dialog opens.
→ Serial Port Setup on page 169
→ LAN Port Setup on page 168
3
NMEA Sentence
Select which NMEA sentence to be used for the communication.
a
Auto
The EK60 will read all relevant telegrams. If the specified information is
provided to the system on more than one telegram format, a built-in priority
list will be used.
b
GGA
This telegram contains time, position and fix related data from a global
positioning system (GPS).
→ GGA Global positioning system fix data on page 179
c
GLL
This telegram is used to transfer latitude and longitude of vessel position, time
of position fix and status from a global positioning system (GPS).
→ GLL Geographical position latitude/longitude on page 179
d
RMC
This telegram contains time, date, position, course and speed data provided by
a global navigation satellite system (GNSS) receiver.
→ RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data on page 181
102
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
4
Talker ID
If you wish to specify a dedicated Talker ID on the telegram format, it can be
selected here.
The Talker ID is the first two characters in the NMEA sentence. Select None to
accept all talker identifiers.
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
• LAN Port Setup on page 168
• Serial Port Setup on page 169
• About the NMEA telegram format on page 174
• Telegram formats on page 174
Navigation; Speed tab
The parameters on this
Navigation tab allows you
to control the interface with
external speed sensors. These
are typically GPS systems
or dedicated speed sensors
providing their data on a serial
line or by means of the local
area network.
The information from the speed
sensor system provides the
speed information on the EK60 Status bar.
Parameters
1
Port
Select which serial or Ethernet port to use for this communication.
2
Setup
Once you have selected a serial or Ethernet communication port, click this button to
set up the applicable port parameters. The relevant port setup dialog opens.
→ Serial Port Setup on page 169
→ LAN Port Setup on page 168
3
NMEA Sentence
Select which NMEA sentence to be used for the communication.
a
Auto
The EK60 will read all relevant telegrams. If the specified information is
provided to the system on more than one telegram format, a built-in priority
list will be used.
164692/D
103
Simrad EK60
b
VBW
This telegram contains the compass heading to which the vessel points and the
speed of the vessel relative to the water.
→ VBW Dual ground and water speed on page 182
c
VTG
This telegram contains the actual course and speed relative to the ground.
→ VTG Course over ground & ground speed on page 183
d
RMC
This telegram contains time, date, position, course and speed data provided by
a global navigation satellite system (GNSS) receiver.
→ RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data on page 181
4
Talker ID
If you wish to specify a dedicated Talker ID on the telegram format, it can be
selected here.
The Talker ID is the first two characters in the NMEA sentence. Select None to
accept all talker identifiers.
5
Manual speed
If you do not have any information from a speed sensor, or if you wish to enter the
vessel's speed manually, you can click this box. When it is enabled, you can enter
the vessel speed manually using the Speed spin box.
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
• LAN Port Setup on page 168
• Serial Port Setup on page 169
• About the NMEA telegram format on page 174
• Telegram formats on page 174
Navigation; Distance tab
The parameters on this
Navigation tab allows you
to control the interface with
external distance sensors. These
are typically GPS systems
or dedicated distance sensors
providing their data on a serial
line or by means of the local
area network.
Parameters
1 Source
Select the source for the distance information.
104
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
a
None
No distance information is accepted.
b
Speed
The distance information is calculated using the speed information received by
the echo sounder. If will always start with the previously calculated distance. If
you need to reset this to zero (or any other value), use the Distance parameter.
c
Datagram
The distance information is received using appropriate datagram(s) from an
external source.
d
Hardware pulse
The distance information is received using contact pulses connected to a serial
port, or to a General Purpose Transceiver (GPT)
2
Port
Select which serial or Ethernet port to use for this communication.
3
Setup
Once you have selected a serial or Ethernet communication port, click this button to
set up the applicable port parameters. The relevant port setup dialog opens.
→ Serial Port Setup on page 169
→ LAN Port Setup on page 168
4
NMEA Sentence
Select which NMEA sentence to be used for the communication.
a VLW
This telegram contains the distance travelled relative to the water and over
the ground.
→ VLW Dual ground/water distance on page 183
5
Talker ID
If you wish to specify a dedicated Talker ID on the telegram format, it can be
selected here.
The Talker ID is the first two characters in the NMEA sentence. Select None to
accept all talker identifiers.
6
Distance
The current vessel distance can be set manually using the spin box
This parameter is only available for use when Source is set to None, Speed or
Hardware pulse.
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
• LAN Port Setup on page 168
• Serial Port Setup on page 169
• About the NMEA telegram format on page 174
164692/D
105
Simrad EK60
• Telegram formats on page 174
Navigation; Heading tab
The parameters on this
Navigation tab allows you
to control the interface with
external heading sensors. These
are typically GPS systems or
dedicated gyro or compass
systems providing their data on
a serial line or by means of the
local area network.
The information from the
heading sensor provides the
heading information on the EK60 Status bar.
Parameters
1
Port
Select which serial or Ethernet port to use for this communication.
2
Setup
Once you have selected a serial or Ethernet communication port, click this button to
set up the applicable port parameters. The relevant port setup dialog opens.
→ Serial Port Setup on page 169
→ LAN Port Setup on page 168
3
NMEA Sentence
Select which NMEA sentence to be used for the communication.
a
Auto
The EK60 will read all relevant telegrams. If the specified information is
provided to the system on more than one telegram format, a built-in priority
list will be used.
b
HDT
This telegram is used to transfer heading information from a gyro.
→ HDT Heading, true on page 181
c
HDM
This telegram contains vessel heading in degrees magnetic.
→ HDM Heading, magnetic on page 181
d
HDG
This telegram contains the heading from a magnetic sensor, which if corrected
for deviation will produce magnetic heading, which if offset by variation will
provide true heading.
→ HDG Heading, deviation and variation on page 180
106
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
e
VHW
This telegram contains the compass heading to which the vessel points and the
speed of the vessel relative to the water.
→ VHW Water speed and heading on page 183
4
Talker ID
If you wish to specify a dedicated Talker ID on the telegram format, it can be
selected here.
The Talker ID is the first two characters in the NMEA sentence. Select None to
accept all talker identifiers.
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
• LAN Port Setup on page 168
• Serial Port Setup on page 169
• About the NMEA telegram format on page 174
• Telegram formats on page 174
Motion
The Motion dialog is opened from the Install menu.
Purpose
The Motion dialog allows you to set up the EK60 to interface with an external motion
sensor.
Description
The heave information is used
in the bottom depth estimation,
and also for display and output
of echogram data. Display of
roll and pitch information can be
useful when replaying previously
recorded data files.
Note that heave information can be monitored in the Status bar.
164692/D
107
Simrad EK60
If you choose to use the analogue input on a General Purpose Transceiver (GPT),
the Setup button allows you to open a dedicated dialog to control the sensitivity and
offset. If the Setup button is unavailable, click Normal →Normal Operation to activate
the transceiver.
Parameters
1
Port
Select which serial or Ethernet port to use for this communication.
You can also choose to use the analogue input on a General Purpose Transceiver
(GPT). A list of the transceivers is provided in the drop-box.
2
Setup
Once you have selected a serial or Ethernet communication port, or analogue input
from a GPT, click this button to set up the applicable parameters. The relevant
setup dialog opens.
3
Protocol: Select data protocol.
• Sounder / TSS1
The EK60 will read motion information on the Sounder/TSS1 format.
– Simrad Sounder/TSS1 Motion protocol on page 190
• Simrad EM1000
The EK60 will read motion information on the Simrad EM1000 format.
– Kongsberg EM Attitude 1000 on page 186
• Simrad EM3000
The EK60 will read motion information on the Simrad EM3000 format.
– Kongsberg EM Attitude 3000 on page 187
If you use the analogue input on a General Purpose Transceiver (GPT), this
parameter is not applicable.
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
• Serial Port Setup on page 169
• LAN Port Setup on page 168
• Analog Motion Sensor Setup on page 172
108
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Trawl
The Trawl dialog is opened from the Install menu.
Purpose
The Trawl dialog allows you to enter the main parameters related to the trawl. Trawl
information is used for display of upper and lower trawl line in the echogram. All
received speed data are stored to file when recording of raw data to file is enabled.
Description
A Simrad ITI (Integrated Trawl
Instrumentation) system can be
connected to the EK60. Communication
with the ITI system is based on NMEA
telegrams, and all necessary parameters
are automatically defined.
Trawl information is used for display
of an upper and/or lower trawl line in
the echogram. All received data are
stored to file when recording of raw data
is enabled.
If another trawl or catch monitoring
system is used, and this system does not provide the trawl opening and/or trawl distance
automatically, the values must be entered manually.
To set up the interface parameters between the trawl or catch monitoring system and the
EK60, use the Port Management dialog.
→ Port Management on page 118
Tip
You may wish to include trawl lines in the echograms. If the distance from the vessel to
the trawl is either manually set different from 0 (zero) in the Trawl dialog, or the trawl
datagram contains a distance different from 0, you will need to enable the distance
counter on the Distance tab in the Navigation dialog.
→ Navigation; Distance tab on page 104
Parameters
1 Port
Select which serial or Ethernet port to use for this communication.
164692/D
109
Simrad EK60
2
Setup
Once you have selected a serial or Ethernet communication port, click this button to
set up the applicable port parameters. The relevant port setup dialog opens.
→ Serial Port Setup on page 169
→ LAN Port Setup on page 168
3
System
Select one of the supported systems.
a
ITI
b
PI
c
Ifremer
Other third party systems are not supported.
4
Trawl Opening
A fixed headrope-to-footrope distance can be manually entered. This is used
for sensor systems not measuring the trawl opening, or when the measured
headrope-to-footrope distance is unreliable.
5
Distance To Trawl
A fixed distance between the vessel and the trawl opening can be manually entered.
For highest accuracy, set the distance between the echo sounder transducer's
physical location and the trawl.
In order to enter this distance, the Distance counter on the Distance tab in the
Navigation dialog must be enabled.
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
• Navigation; Distance tab on page 104
• Port Management on page 118
Environment
The Environment dialog is opened from the Install menu.
Purpose
The dialog Environment is used to adjust the environmental parameters. These
parameters are used for estimating range, propagation loss, and spreading loss, all of
which are essential concepts in the echo sounder.
110
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Description
In order to obtain accurate depth
readings and fish echoes, it is very
important that the sound speed through
the water is set correctly. In the
Environment dialog, you must define
if you work in salt or fresh water.
If the sound speed is unknown, use the
default setting 1494 m/s, as this is a
typical mean value.
Parameters
1
Temperature
Enter the temperature if this is known to you. To find this temperature, you will need
a dedicated instrument. When this temperature is known to the EK60 it will be used
to calculate the absorption, and the echogram information will be more accurate.
2
Salinity
Use this spin box to select salinity in parts per thousands (ppt). If you operate in
fresh water, set salinity to 0 (zero).
3
Sound Speed
Set the current sound speed.
a
Calculate
Click this option if you wish the echo sounder to calculate the sound speed
value based on the specified temperature.
b
Manual
Click this option if you wish to enter the sound speed manually. Use the spin
box.
4
Absorption
Select the frequency in the top spin box, and read the corresponding absorption
value. This input has no effect on the echo sounder, it is simply a calculator!
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
164692/D
111
Simrad EK60
Annotation
The Annotation dialog is opened from the Install menu.
Purpose
The purpose of the Annotations dialog is to allow you to enter comments and annotations
into the echograms.
Description
Several different annotation types may be added
to the echogram. The annotations defined are stored
with the raw data as annotation datagrams. They
are displayed on the echogram if this feature is
enabled in the Echogram dialog.
→ Echogram on page 144
Annotations can only be added during normal
operation.
Parameters
1
Manual Text
Click the button to open the Annotation Text
Input dialog with a text field.
Enter a free text string. The text is written to
the echogram once you click Ok or Apply at
the bottom of the dialog.
2
NMEA
This function enables NMEA Annotation datagrams to be imported on the chosen
port.
In the Port box, select interface port for the datagrams. This selection must match
the actual wiring made during the system installation.
Click Setup to set up the communication parameters for the chosen port. Depending
on the port you have chosen, the LAN Port Setup or Serial Port Setup dialog will
open.
→ LAN Port Setup on page 168
→ Serial Port Setup on page 169
112
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
3
Event
This function initiates annotations whenever an event occur. Events may be
triggered by external devices, set by a timer, or initiated by clicking the Event
button on the toolbar.
a
Number
All events are identified with a number. This number can be included in the
annotation string. Using this feature, you can manually select the next number
to be used, and you can choose to have the number series decrease instead
of increasing.
b
Text
Use this feature to select which items to be included in the event generated
annotation string. You can also add a text string to be included at every event
annotation.
c
Timer
Set a time period for automatic generation of events.
Triggering from external devices are made using pins 10 and 19 on the Auxiliary
connector on the General Purpose Transceiver (GPT). Refer to the EK60 Installation
Manual.
4
Last Annotation
This text box automatically displays the latest annotation text that was entered.
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
• Echogram on page 144
• LAN Port Setup on page 168
• Serial Port Setup on page 169
Remoting
The Remoting dialog is opened from the Install menu.
Purpose
The Remoting dialog allows you to control the remotely controlled operation of the
EK60, both how the EK60 can be controlled from a peripheral system, and how the
EK60 can export information to this system.
164692/D
113
Simrad EK60
Description
The EK60 software and computer can function as a data server for client applications
running on peripheral computers connected to the local area network (LAN). In this case
data are transferred as UDP packets from and to the EK60 server using an Ethernet
adapter with a specific IP address. The Server tab is only used if you want to set up and
use the EK60 computer as a server for such client applications.
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
Remoting: Server
Purpose
The Server tab parameters are used when
you wish to set up your EK60 as a server in
a larger network. This is typically used when
a second computer is installed somewhere
else on the vessel to monitor – and control –
EK60 operations.
If you have two network cards in your computer
we strongly suggest that you:
• use the first network card for communication
with the echo sounder transceiver.
• use the second network card for data transfer between the server (your EK60
computer) and clients (peripheral computers in the network).
The two network cards are then connected to two different networks.
Specify network card for server functionality by selecting the appropriate IP address
from the list. The initial connection between a server and a client is created through on
a specific UDP port number on the server. When the connection is established data
communication is transferred to a new UDP port number which is automatically assigned
by the server. The default local port number for the initial connection can be changed if
you want to use a specific local port number, normally this is not necessary.
Parameters
1
Local IP Address
This is the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the local Ethernet interface board.
In most cases, each Ethernet board has a unique IP address, even when an interface
board supports multiple sockets. If you have more than one interface board, you are
provided with a list of the available addresses.
114
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
2
Local port (UDP)
This port is important if you wish to receive information. It must match the port
number on the remote computer.
To find the port number on the remote computer, consult the documentation for the
software utility to be used. If the data communication is set up to only transmit
information from the EK60, this parameter is not required.
3
Name
This is the name of your product (EK60). The name is fixed, and you are not
permitted to change it.
You will find this information in the Data Source dialog on the remote computer.
4
Description
This is the type of product. The description is fixed, and you are not permitted
to change it.
You will find this information in the Data Source dialog on the remote computer.
5
Application ID
This field allows you to enter a number. The number is used to recognize you EK60
in the larger network.
You will find this information in the Data Source dialog on the remote computer.
Remoting: Client
Purpose
The Client tab parameters are used when you
wish to set up your EK60 as a client in a larger
network. The main EK60 Processor Unit
computer with the transceiver(s) connected
to it is regarded as the ‘server’ in the network.
The EK60 can function as a client receiving
data from an application running on another
processing unit connected to the local area
network. In this case data are transferred as
UDP packets from/to the client through an
Ethernet card with a specific IP address.
The Client tab is only used if you want to use the EK60 as a client receiving data from
another echo sounder program. If you have more than one network card you can select
which one to use for client operations from the list of IP addresses.
The remote port number is the port number on the server (the EK60 computer that
controls the transceiver) which is used to establish the initial connection. This number
must be equal to the local port number found on the Server tab in the Remoting dialog on
the remote server which you wish to connect to.
164692/D
115
Simrad EK60
Normally the client broadcasts a message to obtain information on applications running
on the local area network. A list of these programs is displayed when the Data Source
dialog is opened. In some network configurations broadcasting is not a practical
solution, and in these cases the communication mode can be changed from broadcast
to point-to-point and a specific remote IP address for the server which you want to
connect to can be set.
Parameters
1
Local IP Address
This is the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the local Ethernet interface board.
In most cases, each Ethernet board has a unique IP address, even when an interface
board supports multiple sockets. If you have more than one interface board, you are
provided with a list of the available addresses.
2
Remote IP Address
Select the Internet Protocol (IP) address for the remote computer.
If the data communication is set up to receive data only, this parameter is
not required. If you wish to set up an output for broadcast, define IP address
255.255.255.255. This is the default setting.
If you use point-to-point communication in a closed network, you need to enter
the remote IP address manually.
3
Remote port (UDP)
Specify the local network port. The EK60 uses this network port to transmit
information. The application on the remote computer will “listen” to this port
number.
4
Communication mode
Choose Broadcast or Point-to-Point.
Broadcast mode enables data to be sent from the EK60 to any number of remote
systems. Data is thereby only transmitted to these systems. The remote systems
receive the data, but the EK60 does not receive any reply or acknowledgement
from them.
Point-to-Point mode implies that the EK60 is physically connected only to one
single remote system. The value of such a permanent point-to-point network is
unimpeded communications between the two EK60 and the remote system. A
complete two-way communication system is then used.
116
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Users and Passwords
The Users and Passwords dialog is opened from the Install menu.
Purpose
The Users and Passwords dialog is used to add and remove users, and to set and edit
user properties and passwords.
Description
To prevent unintentional operation of
the echo sounder the “user” concept
is introduced. Each user is assigned
an access level which can be either:
• Administrator: All rights
• Operator: Limited from
performing installation operations
• Observer: Limited from changing settings which will affect raw data recordings
Four users are built-in accounts. These can not be deleted.
• Administrator: User with Administrator rights
• Operator: User with Operator rights
• Observer: User with Observer rights
• Simrad: User with Operator rights
By default the built-in accounts have empty passwords, but this can be changed by a user
with Administrator rights. When the echo sounder program is installed for the first time,
the Administrator user will log in automatically during start up.
Click Install →Users and Passwords. Click Add to add new users. To delete user, click
the name on the list, and then Remove. To change a password, click the name on the
list, and then Properties.
Parameters
1
List of users
The list of current users hold their names, descriptions and access levels. To select a
user, click once on the name in the list.
2
Add
Click to add a new user. The Add User Account dialog appears to accept user name,
description, access level and password.
164692/D
117
Simrad EK60
3
Remove
Click to delete the currently select user.
4
Properties
Click to modify the properties of the currently select user. The User Properties
dialog appears. It allows you to change the description, access level and password.
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
• Add User Account on page 160
• Log In on page 84
• Log Out on page 85
• User Properties on page 160
Port Management
The Port Management dialog is opened from the Install menu.
Purpose
The Port Management dialog allows you to control the properties of each of the available
communication channels on the EK60 computer.
118
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Description
The EK60 software
automatically scans the
computer to locate and
identify Ethernet (LAN)
and serial line interfaces.
Once the software has
established a list of valid
interfaces, you can set up
and control the parameters.
The Port Management
dialog provides two lists,
one for serial ports and
one for Ethernet (LAN)
ports. You can add and
delete ports as permitted by
the interface resources provided by the computer, and you can define communication
parameters for each individual port.
→ Port Management; Serial ports on page 119
→ Port Management; LAN (Ethernet) ports on page 121
Related topics
• Install menu; functions and dialogs on page 95
• Serial Port Setup on page 169
• LAN Port Setup on page 168
• Port Monitor on page 170
Port Management; Serial ports
Parameters
1 Serial Ports
This list displays the available serial ports on the computer.
The list is automatically populated the first time the Port Management dialog is
opened after a EK60 software installation, and will then reflect the initial number of
serial ports available on the computer. If you later add interface hardware to your
computer, you must click the Add button to add the new ports to the list.
• A blue background on a listed port means that the port is currently selected.
• A green background on a listed port means that the EK60 software has tested
and acknowledged this port for use.
• A red background on a listed port means that the EK60 software has tested the
port, but it has failed to work. The port may not be physically present, or another
program on the computer has allocated it.
• A white background on a listed port means that the EK60 software has not yet
tested the port.
164692/D
119
Simrad EK60
2
Name
This is the given identity of the serial port. By default, the serial ports are numbered.
3
Resource
This is the communication port on the EK60 computer. These are normally named
COM1, COM2 etc.
4
Baudrate
This cell shows the current baudrate specified for the serial line. Standard baudrate
defined for NMEA communication is 4800 baud.
5
Data bits
This column specifies the number of data bits used in the serial line communication.
6
Parity
This column specifies the parity used in the serial line communication.
7
Protocol
This is the current protocol specified for the serial line.
Each serial line can receive multiple telegrams simultaneously, provided that the
telegrams all use the same protocol.
However, only one peripheral device may be physically connected to the port. If
you wish to connect several peripheral devices to a single serial port, you must
route these through a “mixer”. This can be a hardware unit or computer collecting
and streaming the telegrams.
8
Sensor
This column is used to identify the external sensor currently connected to the serial
line.
9
Add
Click this button to add a new serial port.
This is required if you have added new hardware to the computer, for example by
installing an extra interface circuit board. If you have previously released an unused
serial port, but wish to bring it back to EK60 use, you must also click this button.
The button is disabled if the computer has no more serial communication ports to
offer. If ports are available, a small dialog is opened to choose port.
10 Remove
Once the EK60 has identified and listed all the available serial lines on the computer,
these can not be used by any other software applications on the same computer.
If the EK60 does not need a specific serial line, it can be released for other use. Click
on the applicable port to select it, then click the Remove button to delete the port from
the list. Note that no acknowledgement is required, the port is removed instantly.
120
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
11 Setup
In order to use a serial line to receive or transmit information, its communication
parameters must be set up to match the properties of the peripheral device.
Click one of the listed ports to select it, then click the Setup button to set up the port
parameters. A dedicated dialog is provided.
→ Serial Port Setup on page 169
12 Monitor
If you suspect that the communication on the port is ineffective, faulty or missing,
you can monitor the flow of telegrams.
Click one of the listed ports to select it, then click the Monitor button to observe the
data communication on the selected port. A dedicated dialog is provided.
→ Port Monitor on page 170
Port Management; LAN (Ethernet) ports
Parameters
1 LAN Ports
This list displays the available Ethernet local area network (LAN) ports on the
computer.
Each Ethernet interface board on the computer supports any number of network
ports. To add a new port, you must click the Add button to add the new ports
to the list.
2 Name
This is the given identity of the local area network (LAN) port. By default, the
ports are numbered.
3 Local IP
This is the IP number of the network card in the computer that you are using.
4 Local Port
This is local port on the chosen network card in the computer that you are using.
5 Remote IP
This is the Internet Protocol (IP) address of a remote computer.
If you wish to export information to another computer, you must either define this IP
address, or enter IP broadcast address 255.255.255.255. The broadcast address
will allow all computers connected to the network to receive the information. If
only you wish to receive information on the LAN port, you do not need to define
this address.
6 Remote port
If you wish to establish point-to-point communication for data import from a
peripheral device on the network, you may need to define the network port on the
remote computer.
To find this port number, consult the documentation for software utility to be used
on the remote computer.
164692/D
121
Simrad EK60
7
Protocol
This is the current protocol specified for the LAN port. Each LAN port can receive
multiple telegrams simultaneously, provided that the telegrams all use the same
protocol.
8
Sensor
This column is used to identify the external sensor currently connected to the local
area network communication.
9
Add
Click this button to add a new LAN (Ethernet) port.
This is required if you have added new hardware to the computer, for example
by installing an extra Ethernet interface board. If you have previously released
an unused LAN port, but wish to bring it back to EK60 use, you must also click
this button.
10 Remove
Once the EK60 has identified and listed all the available LAN ports on the computer,
these can not be used by any other software applications on the same computer.
If the EK60 does not need a specific LAN port, it can be released for other use. Click
on the applicable port to select it, then click the Remove button to delete the port from
the list. Note that no acknowledgement is required, the port is removed instantly.
11 Setup
In order to use a LAN (Ethernet) port to receive or transmit information, its
communication parameters must be set up to match the peripheral device.
Click one of the listed ports to select it, then click the Setup button to set up the port
parameters. A dedicated dialog is provided.
→ LAN Port Setup on page 168
12 Monitor
If you suspect that the communication on the port is ineffective, faulty or missing,
you can monitor the flow of telegrams.
Click one of the listed ports to select it, then click the Monitor button to observe the
data communication on the selected port. A dedicated dialog is provided.
→ Port Monitor on page 170
122
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Output menu; functions and dialogs
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the Output menu.
1
File (Output)
The File Output dialog is used to specify which output you wish to save to a data
file, and in which disk directory the data file(s) shall be placed.
→ File Output on page 123
2
Ethernet (Output)
The purpose of the Ethernet Output dialog is to define the communication
parameters for the EK500 datagram output on the Ethernet port.
→ Ethernet Output on page 127
3
Depth (Output)
The Depth Output dialog is used to set up the output of depth data from the EK60 to
a dedicated communication port on a specified format.
→ Depth Output on page 128
File Output
The File Output dialog is opened from the Output menu.
Purpose
The File Output dialog is used to specify which output you wish to save to a data file, and
in which disk directory the data file(s) shall be placed.
Description
The File Output dialog provides you with three tabs to set up the output parameters.
1
Directory
Use the parameters in this dialog to define where (on which disk and folder) the
raw data files shall be stored.
→ File Output; Directory tab on page 124
2
Raw Data
Use this tab to save raw data files, to control their sizes, and to specify automatic
start of the recording. Raw data files can be recorded by the EK60 and stored to file.
These raw data files can later be replayed by the EK60 for further analysis.
→ File Output; Raw Data tab on page 125
164692/D
123
Simrad EK60
3
Processed Data
Use this tab to set up the EK60 to export EK500 datagrams to file, and choose which
information be included in the saved file.
→ File Output; Processed Data tab on page 126
Related topics
• Recording raw data on page 28
• Replay on page 78
• EK500 Datagram on page 162
• HAC Datagram on page 166
File Output; Directory tab
Use the parameters in this dialog to define
where (on which disk and folder) the raw
data files shall be stored.
Note
Raw data files will normally become very
large. If you wish to record large amounts
of EK60 raw data, make sure that you
have enough space on you hard disk.
Unless your computer is equipped with
a very large disk capacity, we recommend
that you save the raw data to an external
storage device.
Parameters
1
Current output directory
This field displays the file path currently selected to store the data files.
2
Browse
Click this button to select a different output directory (folder) to store the files. A
standard operating system dialog is used. You are also permitted to create a new
folder.
124
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
File Output; Raw Data tab
Use this tab to save raw data files,
to control their sizes, and to specify
automatic start of the recording. Raw
data files can be recorded by the EK60
and stored to file. These raw data files can
later be replayed by the EK60 for further
analysis.
Each raw data file name has the following
format:
PREFIX
DYYYYMMDD
THHMMSS
Parameters
1
General
a
Save Raw Data
Check this box to save raw data to file.
b
File Name Prefix
Type any name into the text box. The chosen name will be used as prefix in
all the raw data file names.
c
Range
Use this spin box to define which range to collect echo sounder data from.
2
File Size
a
Max(imum) Vessel Distance
Use this spin box to define a limit (in nautical miles) for the maximum distance
to be contained in one file. A value of 0 means no limit.
b
Max(imum) File Size
Use this spin box to define a limit for the maximum amount of bytes to be
contained in one raw data file. A value of 0 means no limit.
c
Current File Size
When recording raw data is in progress the current file size is displayed.
3
Automatic Start
Raw data output can be set to start automatically after a predefined sailing distance.
a
Start at vessel distance
Select required sailing distance (in nautical miles) before raw data output is
initiated.
164692/D
125
Simrad EK60
File Output; Processed Data tab
Use this tab to set up the EK60 to export
EK500 datagrams to file, and choose
which information be included in the
saved file.
Data processed by the EK60 data can also
be exported to a file.
To support programs using data from the
Simrad EK500 echo sounder, the EK60
can output EK500 defined datagrams
on an Ethernet (LAN) output. These
datagrams can also be recorded onto a file.
Parameters
1
Save EK500
Check this box to choose to save
EK500 datagrams to file.
Note
In order to disable this function, and to stop the EK60 from saving EK500 datagrams
to file, you must first clear this check box, and then restart the EK60 application.
2
Save HAC
Click this button to open the HAC Datagram dialog to set up the individual
datagrams.
→ HAC Datagram on page 166
3
Max(imum) File Size
Use this spin box to define a limit for the maximum amount of bytes to be contained
in one HAC data file. A value of 0 means no limit.
Related topics
• Recording raw data on page 28
• Replay on page 78
• EK500 Datagram on page 162
• HAC Datagram on page 166
126
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Ethernet Output
The Ethernet Output dialog is opened from the Output menu.
Purpose
The purpose of the Ethernet Output dialog is to define the communication parameters for
the EK500 datagram output on the Ethernet port.
Description
To support programs which use data from
the Simrad EK500 echo sounder, the EK60
can output a subset of the EK500 defined
datagrams. This dialog allows you to
enable or disable the EK500 datagram
output to the Ethernet port.
This output port is not managed by the
Port Management dialog, but handled
separately from this dialog.
Note that additional data can be output to Ethernet using the data subscription
mechanisms in the Data Source dialog.
Tip
If you wish to send data to the Olex system, use Remote port = 2020. Verify the
communication parameters in the documentation provided with the Olex system.
Parameters
1
Output EK500
Click this box to enable or disable the EK500 datagram output.
Note
In order to disable EK500 datagram output, you must also open the EK500 Datagram
dialog and clear all data format check boxes.
2
EK500 Datagram
Click the button to open the EK500 Datagram dialog. In this dialog, you can set up
the individual datagrams to be exported.
→ EK500 Datagram on page 162
164692/D
127
Simrad EK60
3
Local IP Address
This is the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the local Ethernet interface board.
In most cases, each Ethernet board has a unique IP address, even when an interface
board supports multiple sockets. If you have more than one interface board, you are
provided with a list of the available addresses.
4
Remote port (UDP)
Specify the local network port. The EK60 uses this network port to transmit
information. The application on the remote computer will “listen” to this port
number.
5
Remote IP Address
Select the Internet Protocol (IP) address for the remote computer.
If the data communication is set up to receive data only, this parameter is
not required. If you wish to set up an output for broadcast, define IP address
255.255.255.255. This is the default setting.
If you use point-to-point communication in a closed network, you need to enter
the remote IP address manually.
6
Communication mode
Choose Broadcast or Point-to-Point.
Broadcast mode enables data to be sent from the EK60 to any number of remote
systems. Data is thereby only transmitted to these systems. The remote systems
receive the data, but the EK60 does not receive any reply or acknowledgement
from them.
Point-to-Point mode implies that the EK60 is physically connected only to one
single remote system. The value of such a permanent point-to-point network is
unimpeded communications between the two EK60 and the remote system. A
complete two-way communication system is then used.
Related topics
• Output menu; functions and dialogs on page 123
• EK500 Datagram on page 162
• Port Management on page 118
Depth Output
The Depth Output dialog is opened from the Output menu.
Purpose
The Depth Output dialog is used to set up the output of depth data from the EK60 to a
dedicated communication port on a specified format.
128
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Description
This dialog allows you to define
which port (serial or Ethernet)
to use for depth output, and
which format to use. You can
set up the EK60 to export the
depth information on more than
one port.
The EK60 may output the
current depth on several NMEA
datagram formats, as well as a number of proprietary formats.
The following depth telegram formats are supported:
→ DBS Depth below surface on page 177
→ DBT Depth below transducer on page 178
→ DPT Depth on page 178
→ Simrad EK500 Depth telegram on page 185
→ Atlas depth telegram on page 193
→ PSIMDHB Bottom hardness and biomass on page 190
Tip
You can also specify depth output using the Port Management dialog on the Install menu.
→ Port Management on page 118
Parameters
1
Port
Select which serial or Ethernet port to use for this communication.
2
Setup
Once you have selected a serial or Ethernet communication port, click this button to
set up the applicable port parameters. The relevant port setup dialog opens.
→ Serial Port Setup on page 169
→ LAN Port Setup on page 168
3
Telegram
Select which NMEA sentence or proprietary datagram format to be used for the
communication.
a
None
The EK60 will not export any depth telegrams.
b
DBS
This telegram contains the actual depth below the surface.
→ DBS Depth below surface on page 177
164692/D
129
Simrad EK60
c
DBT
This telegram contains the actual depth below the transducer face.
→ DBT Depth below transducer on page 178
d
DPT
This telegram contains the actual depth.
→ DPT Depth on page 178
e
Simrad
This proprietary Simrad EK500 depth telegram contains the current depth
from three channels.
→ Simrad EK500 Depth telegram on page 185
f
Atlas
This proprietary Atlas depth telegram contains the current depth from two
channels.
→ Atlas depth telegram on page 193
g
PSIMDHB
This proprietary Simrad telegram contains biomass and bottom hardness.
→ PSIMDHB Bottom hardness and biomass on page 190
4
Talker ID
If you wish to specify a dedicated Talker ID on the telegram format, it can be
selected here.
The Talker ID is the first two characters in the NMEA sentence. Select None to
accept all talker identifiers.
5
Channel
This column specifies which transceiver you are using as source for the depth
information. The text string provides the following information:
• Transceiver ID
• Transceiver's IP address
• Transducer name
If you have more than one transceiver, you can choose which one to use.
6
Add
Click this button to add a new serial or Ethernet port for depth data export. You
can export the depth information on several different ports simultaneously using
different datagram formats on each output port.
7
Remove
Click this button to remove the currently selected serial or Ethernet depth output
port.
Related topics
• Output menu; functions and dialogs on page 123
• LAN Port Setup on page 168
130
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
• Serial Port Setup on page 169
• Telegram formats on page 174
• About the NMEA telegram format on page 174
164692/D
131
Simrad EK60
Window menu; functions and dialogs
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the Window menu.
1 New Channel
The New Channel function
is used to display a new channel window. This can either be a new frequency
channel, or a new view of an existing frequency channel.
→ New Channel on page 132
2 Cascade
The Cascade function is used to place the open channel windows partly over each
other.
→ Cascade on page 133
3 Tile
The Tile function is used to display a new channel window. This can either be a new
frequency channel, or a new view of an existing frequency channel.
→ Tile on page 134
4 Open All
The Open All function is used to open all currently activated windows.
→ Open All on page 134
5 Close All
The Close All function is used to close all open channel windows.
→ Close All on page 135
New Channel
The New Channel function is opened from the Window menu.
Purpose
The New Channel function is used to display a new channel window. This can either be a
new frequency channel, or a new view of an existing frequency channel.
Description
Displayed channel windows are listed at the bottom of the Window menu.
To view the channel windows, use the Cascade or Tile commands on the Window menu.
To close a channel, press the “X” at the top right corner of the channel window. To close
all channels, select Close All on the Window menu.
132
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Click Operation →New Channel. Select channel from the sub-menu presenting the
different transceiver/transducer channels installed on the echo sounder.
Note
Sampling, data storage or data output from a frequency channel is not influenced by
opening or closing channel windows. However, the maximum available ping rate may
be affected by the range settings in a channel window.
Related topics
• Window menu; functions and dialogs on page 132
• Cascade on page 133
• Close All on page 135
• Tile on page 134
Cascade
The Cascade function is opened from the Window menu.
Purpose
The Cascade function is used to place the open channel windows partly over each other.
Description
This function is identical to the common function available in the operating system.
The active windows are presented in cascade; that is partly on top of each other with
the top bar shown.
Related topics
• Window menu; functions and dialogs on page 132
• New Channel on page 132
• Close All on page 135
• Tile on page 134
164692/D
133
Simrad EK60
Tile
The Tile function is opened from the Window menu.
Purpose
The Tile function is used to display a new channel window. This can either be a new
frequency channel, or a new view of an existing frequency channel.
Description
This function is identical to the common function available in the operating system.
The active windows are presented tiled; that is reduced in size and automatically fitted
next to each other.
Related topics
• Window menu; functions and dialogs on page 132
• New Channel on page 132
• Cascade on page 133
• Close All on page 135
Open All
The Open All function is opened from the Window menu.
Purpose
The Open All function is used to open all currently activated windows.
Description
All windows are opened automatically.
To close the windows, click Close All on the Window menu.
Related topics
• Window menu; functions and dialogs on page 132
• New Channel on page 132
• Cascade on page 133
• Tile on page 134
• Close All on page 135
134
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Close All
The Close All function is opened from the Window menu.
Purpose
The Close All function is used to close all open channel windows.
Description
All windows are closed automatically.
To create a new window, click New channel on the Window menu. To open all existing
windows, click Open All on the Window menu.
Related topics
• Window menu; functions and dialogs on page 132
• New Channel on page 132
• Cascade on page 133
• Tile on page 134
• Open All on page 134
164692/D
135
Simrad EK60
Help menu; functions and dialogs
The following functions and
parameters are available from
the Help menu.
1
Contents
Use the Contents function option to open the first page of the context sensitive
on-line help system.
→ Contents on page 136
2
About ER60
The About dialog allows you to see the current EK60 software version.
→ Status Bar on page 87
Contents
The Contents function is opened from the Help menu.
Purpose
Use the Contents function option to open the first page of the context sensitive on-line
help system.
Description
The context sensitive on-line help is provided on CHM format.
Microsoft Compiled HTML Help is a Microsoft proprietary online help format. It
was introduced as the successor to Microsoft WinHelp with the release of Windows
98, and is still supported in Windows 7. [...] Help is delivered as a binary file with
the .chm extension. It contains a set of HTML files, a hyperlinked table of contents,
and an index file.
— http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Microsoft_Compiled_HTML_Help (2012)
About
The About function is opened from the Help menu.
Purpose
The About dialog allows you to see the current EK60 software version.
136
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Description
Every EK60 software release is uniquely
identified. The About dialog identifies the EK60
software release.
Related topics
• Help menu; functions and dialogs on page 136
164692/D
137
Simrad EK60
Short-cut menus; functions and dialogs
The following functions and parameters are available from the short-cut menus.
The short-cut menus are opened by clicking the right mouse button when the cursor is
located in any of the views. Various menus are provided depending on the current view.
To make a choice, click on the menu name and observe the drop-down menu. Select a
new item on the drop-down menu by clicking the relevant option.
1
Bottom Detection
The purpose of the Bottom Detection dialog is to define the upper and lower depth
limits most likely to be used during the EK60 operation. In this dialog, you can also
modify the setting for Backstep Min. Level to change the bottom detection relative to
the bottom echo.
→ Bottom Detection on page 140
2
Single Target Detection
The Single Target Detection dialog is used to set the operational parameters for
detecting single targets.
→ Single Target Detection on page 141
3
Colour Scale
The purpose of the Colour Scale dialog is to change the dynamic range of the colour
scale.
→ Colour Scale on page 143
4
Histogram
This Histogram dialog is used to set parameters for the histogram displayed in the
Single Target Histogram view.
→ Histogram on page 144
5
Echogram
The Echogram dialog allows you to set up the parameters controlling the echogram
presentation. The three tabs control the horizontal lines, the echogram type with
applied TVG, and how sample data are converted to pixel data.
→ Echogram on page 144
6
Horizontal Axis
This Horizontal Axis dialog is used to set the horizontal display span of the
Echogram view.
→ Horizontal Axis on page 148
138
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
7
Range
The Bottom Range dialog is used to specify the vertical depth range for the
Echogram view in bottom related echograms.
The Surface Range dialog is used to specify the vertical depth range for the
Echogram view in surface related echograms.
→ Bottom Range on page 149
→ Surface Range on page 151
8
New layer
The New Layer dialog is used to insert a new vertical layer.
→ New Layer on page 152
9
Layer Properties
The Layer Properties dialog is used to edit the properties for the active layer.
→ Layer Properties on page 154
10 Delete Layer
The Delete Layer function is used to delete the active (selected) layer in the view.
The layer is identified with red text in the Numerical view.
→ Delete Layer on page 155
11 Numerical View
The Numerical View dialog is used to select which information is displayed in the
Numerical view.
→ Numerical View on page 156
12 Print
The Print dialog allows you to print the current view.
→ Print on page 156
13 Print Preview
The Print Preview dialog allows you check the printout before you send the job
to the printer.
→ Print Preview on page 157
14 Configure Window
The Configure Window dialog is used to define which views to show in the active
window.
→ Configure Window on page 158
15 Hide View
The Hide View function hides the view from which the command was chosen.
→ Hide View on page 158
164692/D
139
Simrad EK60
Bottom Detection
The Bottom Detection dialog is opened from the Depth short-cut menu.
Purpose
The purpose of the Bottom Detection dialog is to define the upper and lower depth limits
most likely to be used during the EK60 operation. In this dialog, you can also modify the
setting for Backstep Min. Level to change the bottom detection relative to the bottom echo.
Description
The Bottom Detection dialog provides
separate limits for minimum and maximum
depth. These limits may be used to obtain
”bottom lock” on the depth when the
EK60 is pinging. The sounder needs this
lock to locate the correct depth, and to stay
on it during the operation, even though
the depth changes continuously.
The Backstep Min. Level parameter allows
you to manually modify where on the
bottom echo the depth shall be detected.
Parameters
1
Minimum Depth
The bottom detector starts the search for the bottom echo at this depth. The detector
will fail in shallow water if you select a too large depth value, and the tail of the
transmitting pulse may cause problems if a too small value is set.
You can enter the desired Minimum Depth value by dragging the slider up or down,
or by means of the spin box.
2
Maximum Depth
The search for the bottom echo extends down to this depth whenever bottom track
is lost. Enter a slightly larger depth value than the deepest spot you expect to visit
in order to avoid annoyingly long ping intervals every time bottom track is lost. A
depth value of either 0 or less than the minimum depth disables the bottom detector.
Note
If you set maximum depth to a value identical or smaller than the minimum value,
the bottom detection algorithm will be disabled. The EK60 will then not be able to
detect the bottom at all, and the displayed depth will be 0.00 m
You can enter the desired Maximum Depth value by dragging the slider up or down,
or by means of the spin box.
3
140
Backstep Min. Level
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
The Backstep Min. Level parameter allows you to
manually modify where on the bottom pulse the
depth shall be detected. The setting does not have
an effect on the EK60's ability to detect and track
the bottom.
(CD010217-003)
a
The peak of the bottom pulse
b
Default bottom backstep level
c
Approximate bottom backstep level for flatfish
detection
d
Approximate bottom backstep level for seagrass detection
-30 dB
-50 dB
-70 dB
The bottom pulse basically identifies the bottom depth just prior to the peak of the
pulse (A). However, this may not be the true bottom. For example, if the bottom
pulse is generated by a rock bottom under a thick layer of mud, the actual depth is
slightly shallower. For this reason, the EK60 is by default set up to give you a depth
reading a few milliseconds before the peak of the pulse. This is done by setting the
bottom backstep level to a default value of -50 dB (B).
The actual bottom will never appear at the peak of the bottom pulse (A), it will
always be slightly before the peak. By changing the Backstep Min. Level parameter
you can have the bottom detected earlier. This feature can for example be used when
you fish for flatfish, or when you are harvesting seagrass.
→ Bottom slopes on page 227
Related topics
• Short-cut menus; functions and dialogs on page 138
• Bottom slopes on page 227
Single Target Detection
The Single Target Detection dialog is opened from the short-cut menus in the Single
Target Position and the Single Target Histogram views.
You can also open the dialog from the Echo Trace Setup button in the EK500 Datagram
dialog.
Purpose
The Single Target Detection dialog is used to set the operational parameters for detecting
single targets.
164692/D
141
Simrad EK60
Description
Several specific parameters are
available for studies of single fish. In
order to detect single fish correctly,
these parameters must be defined to
suit the target characteristics.
Parameters
1 Min. Threshold (dB)
The target strength for a single
target must exceed this threshold
to be accepted.
2 Min. Echo Length
For a single target detection to
occur the normalized echo length
must exceed this parameter.
3 Max. Echo Length
A single target detection requires the normalized echo length to be less than the
maximum echo length setting.
4 Max. Phase Deviation
Average electrical phase jitter between samples inside an echo from a single target
must not exceed the maximum phase deviation setting where maximum phase
deviation is set in units of phase steps (128 phase steps = 180 electrical degrees).
Recommended setting is 2 to 3 for normal conditions. For weak echoes in noisy
conditions you should allow for more jitter (4 to 10).
5 Max. Gain Compensation
The correction value returned from the transducer gain model must not exceed
the maximum gain compensation setting. (This is the one-way maximum gain
compensation. The two-way maximum compensation will be 12 dB). All single
targets outside the angle corresponding to the chosen gain compensation are
skipped. Thus you can reduce the sample volume (beam angle) by choosing a lower
value for maximum gain compensation.
6 Min. Echo Spacing
The is the minimum spacing between two single echoes required for acceptance.
7 Calibration
Click the Calibration button to start the dedicated calibration program with single
target detections for this layer.
Note that you must click the Apply button before you start the calibration program if
you have made changes to the single target detection parameters. This is to ensure
that the parameters have been applied for the layer.
→ Calibration procedures on page 38
Related topics
• EK500 Datagram on page 162
142
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Colour Scale
The Colour Scale dialog is opened from the Single Target Position, Single Target Histogram
and Colour Scale short-cut menus.
Purpose
The purpose of the Colour Scale dialog is to change the dynamic range of the colour scale.
Description
The total number of colours used in the
presentation will be distributed between
the minimum and maximum levels
identified in this dialog. Values above
maximum level are shown using the
“maximum level” colour, while values
below are shown with the background
colour.
When the dialog is launched from the
Single Target Position and the Single
Target Histogram views, the colour scale represents colour mapping for the 40Log
TVG function. This TVG function is always used for target strength estimation for
single targets. When the dialog is launched from the Colour Scale view, the TVG
function depends on which acoustic variable is chosen for display on the corresponding
Echogram view. This is because the colour scale view represents the colour mapping for
the Echogram view. The TVG functions can be either No, 20Log, or 40Log.
Right-click in the Single Target Position, Single Target Histogram or Colour Scale views
to open the short-cut menu. Click Colour Scale on the menu, and make the necessary
adjustments.
Note
Do not confuse this dialog with the Colours dialog!
Parameters
1 Min. level / Max. level
Use the spin boxes or sliders to set the levels. Altering the maximum or minimum
levels will automatically adjust the colour step.
2 Colour step
Use this setting to define the range in dB each colour will cover. Altering the colour
step will automatically adjust the maximum level.
3 Apply to all
Check this box to make the chosen settings apply to all views.
Related topics
• Colour scale view on page 60
• Single target histogram view on page 57
164692/D
143
Simrad EK60
• Single target position view on page 56
• Colours on page 89
Histogram
The Histogram dialog is opened from the Single Target Histogram short-cut menu.
Purpose
This Histogram dialog is used to set parameters for the histogram displayed in the Single
Target Histogram view.
Description
Right-click in the Single Target
Histogram view to open the short-cut
menu. Click Histogram on the menu, and
make the necessary adjustments.
Parameters
1
Max. Percentage
Use the spin box to define maximum value for the percentage axis in the histogram
display.
2
Resolution
Defines the width of each column in the histogram.
Related topics
• Single target histogram view on page 57
Echogram
The Echogram dialog is opened from the Echogram short-cut menu.
Purpose
The Echogram dialog allows you to set up the parameters
controlling the echogram presentation. The three tabs control
the horizontal lines, the echogram type with applied TVG,
and how sample data are converted to pixel data.
Description
The Echogram dialog is the main source for all echogram
presentation choices.
The dialog is provided with three tabs to set up the parameters.
1
Type
The Type tab in the Echogram dialog is used to specify which types of information
to be displayed in the Echogram view.
144
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
2
Lines
The Lines tab in the Echogram dialog allows you to control the horizontal and
vertical lines used to enhance the echogram presentation. You can add a bottom line,
and you can enable a white line to enhance the presentation. The tab also offers a
trawl line, and you can choose the vertical scale of the echogram. Finally, the Lines
tab offers time or distance markers, and you can enable annotations.
3
Pixels
The Pixels tab in the Echogram dialog is used to specify how sample data are
converted to pixel data.
Related topics
• Surface Range on page 151
• Bottom Range on page 149
Echogram; Type tab
The Type tab in the Echogram
dialog is used to specify which
types of information to be
displayed in the Echogram view.
Related topics
1 Reference
These selections define the
range reference. All ranges
in the Echogram view can
be referenced to either
the surface or the bottom
depth detected by the echo
sounder. The current depth
range is specified in the
Surface Range and Bottom
Range dialogs.
2 Backscatter
These selections define the type of acoustic backscatter data to be displayed in
the Echogram view.
a Pr (No TVG): Power.
b Sv (20 log TVG): Volume backscattering strength.
c Sp (40 log TVG): Point backscattering strength.
d TS (40 log TVG): Target strength. Only signals accepted as single targets are
displayed. These values are beam compensated.
e Sp & TS (40 log TVG): Point backscattering strength overlaid with Target
strength data.
Related topics
• Surface Range on page 151
164692/D
145
Simrad EK60
• Bottom Range on page 149
Echogram; Lines tab
The Lines tab in the Echogram
dialog allows you to control
the horizontal and vertical lines
used to enhance the echogram
presentation. You can add
a bottom line, and you can
enable a white line to enhance
the presentation. The tab also
offers a trawl line, and you can
choose the vertical scale of the
echogram. Finally, the Lines tab
offers time or distance markers,
and you can enable annotations.
Parameters
1
Horizontal Bottom
The bottom line can be
switched off or on. In addition, you can enable either white line or bottom hardness
information.
a
Bottom Line
When enabled, the detected bottom depth is shown as a thin line in the
echogram. The line is drawn in the current foreground colour.
b
White Line
A band in the current background colour is drawn below the detected bottom
depth.
2
Horizontal Trawl
This field allows you to enable or disable the trawl line on the echogram.
a
Trawl
Whenever available and connected, trawl systems (PI and ITI) communicate
headrope depth and/or headrope-to-footrope distance to the EK60 at regular
intervals.
Manual trawl parameters can be entered using the Trawl dialog. This is
useful for trawl sensor systems not measuring the trawl opening, or when the
measured headrope-to-footrope distance is unreliable.
If you have a Simrad PI or ITI system connected, you can monitor the depth
of the applicable sensors. The information from these sensors are drawn as
horizontal lines on the EK60 echogram.
146
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
To set up an interface port to communicate with the PI and ITI system(s), use
the Port Monitor dialog.
→ Trawl on page 109
→ Port Management on page 118
The Trawl echogram is only drawn when trawl position information is available.
3
Scale
When enabled, equidistant horizontal scale lines are drawn inside the echogram in
the current foreground colour; black during day and white during night.
A maximum of 50 scale lines can be selected.
No scale lines are drawn when the scale line count is set to zero.
4
Vertical Ticks
When enabled, this function places vertical markers on the echogram.
a
None
No vertical markers are shown.
b
Ping
If you select this option, a short vertical line is drawn in the upper part of the
echogram once every specified number of pings.
c
Time
This option places a short vertical line in the upper part of the echogram once
every specified number of seconds.
d
Distance
This option inserts a short vertical line is drawn in the upper part of the
echogram once every specified number of nautical miles.
e
Annotations
Select Text or Line to allow annotations to be displayed in the echogram view.
If you select Line, the text annotation will be followed by a vertical line for
improved visibility.
Related topics
• Surface Range on page 151
• Bottom Range on page 149
164692/D
147
Simrad EK60
Echogram; Pixels tab
The Pixels tab in the Echogram
dialog is used to specify how
sample data are converted to
pixel data.
Each ping consists a given
number of data samples, where
the number of samples is set
by the current depth range. This
number of samples does not
necessarily match the number of
vertical pixels in the Echogram
view. The data samples must
therefore be compressed or
expanded to fit the number of
available pixels. In other echo
sounders, this function is handled
automatically without allowing the user to control the process.
Parameters
1
Compression
These options describe the situation when the number of samples is higher than the
number of pixels, and multiple samples are compressed into one pixel.
• Mean : The mean of the samples is used as pixel value.
• Peak: The peak value of the samples is used as pixel value.
2
Expansion
These options describe the situation when the number of samples is lower than the
number of pixels, and the sample values are expanded to pixel values.
• Interpolation: Pixel values are interpolated between two sample values.
• Copy: A sample value is copied into multiple pixel values.
Related topics
• Surface Range on page 151
• Bottom Range on page 149
Horizontal Axis
The Horizontal Axis dialog is opened from the Echogram short-cut menu.
Purpose
This Horizontal Axis dialog is used to set the horizontal display span of the Echogram
view.
148
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Description
The Horizontal Axis dialog allows
you to choose the horizontal scale
of the echogram. This controls how
“fast” the echogram moves from right
towards left across the display.
Parameters
1
Horizontal Axis
You can set up the horizontal speed based on four parameters.
• Distance
The horizontal scale of the echogram is based on sailed distance. Choose
resolution and units with the spin boxes provided.
• Time
The horizontal scale of the echogram is based on time. Choose resolution and
units with the spin boxes provided.
• Ping
The horizontal scale of the echogram is based on the number of pings
(transmissions) made. Choose resolution and units with the spin boxes provided.
Check the View Size box to specify that the number of horizontal pixels shall
define the number of displayed horizontal pings (One ping per pixel).
2
Label
These choices control the information label in the bottom left corner of the
echogram. This label is used to identify the axis.
Related topics
• Echogram view on page 58
Bottom Range
The Bottom Range dialog is opened from the Echogram short-cut menu.
Purpose
The Bottom Range dialog is used to specify the vertical depth range for the Echogram
view in bottom related echograms.
164692/D
149
Simrad EK60
Description
The parameters defined in this dialog
are only implemented for bottom related
echograms.
The dialog title and the range settings
will be surface related if the dialog is
opened in a surface referenced echogram.
See Surface Range on page 151 for more
information.
The dialog title and the range settings will
be bottom related if the dialog is opened
in a bottom referenced echogram.
Parameters
1
Start Relative Bottom
This parameter controls the start depth when the echogram is bottom related.
In this mode, the echogram will focus on the echoes from the chosen start depth
and down to bottom, but since the echogram is bottom related, the bottom will
appear to be flat. The vertical expansion is defined by the Range value. Note that
positive is always downwards. When the Start Relative Bottom is set to a negative
value it will start at this value above the bottom with the range value defining the
vertical expansion.
Example 3
Start Relative Bottom
In a bottom echogram, set the Start Relative Bottom value to –5 meters. This
will make the echogram start from 5 meters above the bottom. Set Range to
the 5 meters plus 10 = 15 meters. The echogram will now show the area from
5 meters above the depth, and down to 10 meters “below” the bottom. The
bottom contour will appear as a flat line.
Tip
Many users prefer to use two channel windows for each echo sounder frequency.
One channel window is then used for a surface related echogram using a large
range, while the other presents a bottom related echogram to study the area close
to the seabed.
2
Range
This parameter controls the depth range.
The start depth for the vertical range shown on the display will always be the current
depths defined by the Start Relative Surface and Start Relative Bottom values. The
range you select (using a positive value) will determine the vertical expansion from
this start depth and down towards the bottom.
150
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
3
Apply to all
Check this box to apply the new range setting to all current bottom echograms.
Related topics
• Echogram view on page 58
• Surface Range on page 151
• Echogram on page 144
• EK500 Datagram on page 162
Surface Range
The Surface Range dialog is opened from the Echogram short-cut menu.
Purpose
The Surface Range dialog is used to specify the vertical depth range for the Echogram
view in surface related echograms.
Description
Parameters
1
Start Relative Surface
This parameter controls the start depth
when the echogram is surface related.
In this mode, the echogram will
display echoes from the defined start
depth and down towards the bottom.
The vertical presentation may be
limited by the Range value. If the
Range value larger than the current
depth, the echogram will cover the
area all the way down to the bottom.
However, if the Range value is set to
a lower value than the current depth, this will limit the vertical coverage of the
echogram.
Example 4
Start Relative Surface
In a surface echogram, set the Start Relative Surface value to 0 meters.
This will make the echogram start from the sea surface (provided that the
transducer offset has been defined). Set Range to the current depth plus 20
meters. The echogram will now show the area from the sea surface and down
to 20 meters “below” the bottom. The bottom contour is easily detected when
the depth changes.
164692/D
151
Simrad EK60
Tip
Many users prefer to use two channel windows for each echo sounder frequency.
One channel window is then used for a surface related echogram using a large
range, while the other presents a bottom related echogram to study the area close
to the seabed.
2
Range
This parameter controls the depth range.
3
Apply to all
Check this box to apply the new range setting to all current surface echograms.
Related topics
• Echogram view on page 58
• Bottom Range on page 149
• Echogram on page 144
• EK500 Datagram on page 162
New Layer
The New Layer dialog is opened from the Echogram and Numerical short-cut menus.
Purpose
The New Layer dialog is used to insert a new vertical layer.
Description
Layers are used to calculate
various values for a specific
range in the water column.
The calculated values
can be displayed in the
Numerical view. All single
targets detections which
are displayed in the Single
Target Position view and
the Single Target Histogram
view are detected within a
layer.
Click Echogram →New
Layer or Numerical →New Layer to create a new layer.
Parameters
1
152
Limits
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
a
Start Relative Surface
This parameter controls the depth at the upper boundary of the layer, relative to
the surface depth depending on the selected layer type.
b
Start Relative Bottom
This parameter controls the depth at the upper boundary of the layer, relative
the detected bottom depth depending on the selected layer type.
c
Range
This parameter controls the vertical depth range for the layer. Please note that
positive is always downwards. This means that a start range relative bottom
of for example -10 m means 10 m above bottom.
2
Type
a
Surface
The range settings for the layer are referenced to the surface. The layer is
downwards limited by the detected bottom depth if this value is shallower than
the specified lower range limit for the layer. Pings without bottom detections
are ignored in the calculations.
b
Pelagic
The range settings for the layer are referenced to the surface. The layer is not
downwards limited by the detected bottom depth.
c
Bottom
The range settings for the layer are referenced to the bottom. The layer is
downwards limited by the detected bottom depth.
3
Integration
a
Targets Integration
Check this box to calculate integration values based on single target detections.
Compared with the normal integration (sA) this value can be used to get an idea
of how much of the biomass has been detected as single targets.
b
Margin
This is the margin to the surface and the bottom used when calculating
integration values for Surface and Bottom types.
c
Sv threshold
This is the lower threshold used when calculating integration values for the
layer.
Related topics
• Numerical view on page 61
• Delete Layer on page 155
• Layer Properties on page 154
164692/D
153
Simrad EK60
Layer Properties
The Layer Properties dialog is opened from the Echogram and Numerical short-cut menus.
Purpose
The Layer Properties dialog is used to edit the properties for the active layer.
Description
Layers are used to calculate
various values for a specific
range in the water column.
The calculated values
can be displayed in the
Numerical view. All single
targets detections which
are displayed in the Single
Target Position view and
the Single Target Histogram
view are detected within a
layer.
In the Numerical or
Echogram view, right-click to open the short-cut menu. Click Layer properties on the
menu to open the dialog, and make the required adjustments.
Parameters
1 Limits
a Start Relative Surface
This parameter controls the depth at the upper boundary of the layer, relative to
the surface depth depending on the selected layer type.
b Start Relative Bottom
This parameter controls the depth at the upper boundary of the layer, relative
the detected bottom depth depending on the selected layer type.
c Range
This parameter controls the vertical depth range for the layer. Please note that
positive is always downwards. This means that a start range relative bottom
of for example -10 m means 10 m above bottom.
2 Type
a Surface
The range settings for the layer are referenced to the surface. The layer is
downwards limited by the detected bottom depth if this value is shallower than
the specified lower range limit for the layer. Pings without bottom detections
are ignored in the calculations.
b Pelagic
The range settings for the layer are referenced to the surface. The layer is not
downwards limited by the detected bottom depth.
154
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
c
Bottom
The range settings for the layer are referenced to the bottom. The layer is
downwards limited by the detected bottom depth.
3
Integration
a
Targets Integration
Check this box to calculate integration values based on single target detections.
Compared with the normal integration (sA) this value can be used to get an idea
of how much of the biomass has been detected as single targets.
b
Margin
This is the margin to the surface and the bottom used when calculating
integration values for Surface and Bottom types.
c
Sv threshold
This is the lower threshold used when calculating integration values for the
layer.
Related topics
• Echogram view on page 58
• Numerical view on page 61
• Delete Layer on page 155
• New Layer on page 152
Delete Layer
The Delete Layer function is opened from the Echogram and Numerical short-cut menus.
Purpose
The Delete Layer function is used to delete the active (selected) layer in the view. The
layer is identified with red text in the Numerical view.
Description
The active layer is shown with red text
In the Numerical view, left-click the layer you wish
to delete. Observe that the text in the layer changes to
red colour. Right-click in the Numerical or Echogram
views to open the short-cut menu. Click Delete Layer
on the menu.
Related topics
• Numerical view on page 61
• New Layer on page 152
• Layer Properties on page 154
164692/D
155
Simrad EK60
Numerical View
The Numerical View dialog is opened from the Numerical short-cut menu.
Purpose
The Numerical View dialog is used to select which information is displayed in the
Numerical view.
Description
Right-click in the Numerical view
to open the short-cut menu. Click
Numerical on the menu. Check the boxes
in front of the information you wish to
see.
For additional information about the
alternatives, see the Numerical view
description in section Numerical view
on page 61.
Related topics
• Numerical view on page 61
Print
The Print dialog is opened from all the short-cut menus.
Purpose
The Print dialog allows you to print the current view.
Description
Right-click in any view to
open the short-cut menu, then
click Print. Select printer, and
adjust the printer properties
if necessary.
This is a standard operating
system dialog. The
appearance may differ
between the operating
systems, and the text will
be in the operating system’s
language.
Parameters
1
Name
Printer name. Select the printer you wish to use.
156
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
2
Properties
If necessary, click this button to modify the printer properties.
Related topics
• Print Preview on page 157
Print Preview
The Print Preview dialog is opened from all the short-cut menus.
Purpose
The Print Preview dialog allows you check the printout before you send the job to the
printer.
Description
This is a standard
operating system dialog.
The appearance may
differ between the
operating systems,
and the text will be in
the operating system’s
language.
Right-click in any
view to open the Depth
short-cut menu, then
click Print Preview.
Click the icons to do the
necessary tasks.
Parameters
1
Print
Sends the job to the default printer.
Note that the Print dialog does not appear, so you if you wish to use a printer other
than your default, you need to change this before you open the Print Preview dialog.
Zoom:
2
This icon allows you to zoom in and out on the print preview.
3
Page layout
These icons allow you to print a multiple page document onto one paper page.
Note
This function is not applicable for the EK60, as the built-in printing functionality
only will provide a single page output.
164692/D
157
Simrad EK60
4
Close
Click this button to close the Print Preview dialog.
5
Select page
This spin box allows you to print a selected page from a multiple page document.
Note
This function is not available on the EK60.
Related topics
• Print on page 156
Configure Window
The Configure Window dialog is opened from all the short-cut menus.
Purpose
The Configure Window dialog is used to define which views to show in the active window.
Description
Right-click in any view to open the Depth
short-cut menu, then click Configure
Window. Use the check boxes to show
or hide views in the window. Hiding a
view does not disable it. This means that
all data for this view are still collected
while the view is hidden.
Hide View
The Hide View function is opened from
all the short-cut menus.
Purpose
The Hide View function hides the view from which the command was chosen.
Description
Right-click in any view to open the short-cut menu, then click Hide View.
The view can be re-established by selecting Configure Window from the short-cut menu
in another view in the same window, and check the box for the view which was initially
hidden.
Related topics
• Configure Window on page 158
158
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Secondary functions and dialogs
The dialogs described in this section are all opened from within the other EK60 dialogs.
They are thus not opened directly from the menu system.
1
Add User Account
The Add User Account dialog is used to enter user information when a new user is
added to the program.
→ Add User Account on page 160
2
User Properties
The User Properties dialog is used to change the description, password and access
level for an existing user.
→ User Properties on page 160
3
Configure Statusbar
The Configure Statusbar dialog is used to select which sensor information to display
on the Status Bar.
→ Configure Statusbar on page 161
4
EK500 Datagram
The EK500 Datagram dialog is used to specify which EK500 datagrams to output.
Note that changes made in this dialog will have effects on both Ethernet and file
outputs of EK500 data.
→ EK500 Datagram on page 162
5
Errors
The Errors and Warnings dialogs allow you to read and acknowledge messages
from the EK60.
→ Errors on page 164
6
Warnings
The Errors and Warnings dialogs allow you to read and acknowledge messages
from the EK60.
→ Warnings on page 165
7
HAC Datagram
Use the HAC Datagram dialog to set up which HAC datagrams to be exported.
→ HAC Datagram on page 166
8
LAN Port Setup
The LAN Port Setup dialog allows you to define the parameters for Ethernet (Local
Area Network (LAN)) communication with external sensors (measuring devices)
or peripheral systems.
→ LAN Port Setup on page 168
164692/D
159
Simrad EK60
9
Serial Port Setup
The Serial Port Setup dialog allows you to define the parameters for serial
communication.
→ Serial Port Setup on page 169
10 Port Monitor
The Port Monitor dialog allows you to study the communication stream on the
chosen serial or Ethernet (Local Area Network (LAN)) port.
→ Port Monitor on page 170
11 Transducer Parameters
The Transducer Parameters dialog allows you to manually modify key transducer
parameters.
→ Transducer Parameters on page 172
12 Analog Motion Sensor Setup
The Analog Motion Sensor Setup dialog allows you to define the sensitivity and
offset values for the analogue motion input.
→ Analog Motion Sensor Setup on page 172
Add User Account
The Add User Account dialog is opened from the Users and Passwords dialog.
Purpose
The Add User Account dialog is used to enter user information when a new user is added
to the program.
Description
In order to assign a new user, he or she must be
assigned an access level. These are described in
the User and Passwords dialog description.
→ Users and Passwords on page 117
Click Install →Users and Passwords. Click Add
to add a new user.
Related topics
• Users and Passwords on page 117
• User Properties on page 160
User Properties
The User Properties dialog is opened from the Users and Passwords dialog.
Purpose
The User Properties dialog is used to change the description, password and access level
for an existing user.
160
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Description
If you wish to change the name as well, you need
to delete the user using the Remove button in the
Users and Passwords dialog, and then click Add
to establish a new user.
Click Install →Users and Passwords. To modify
the user properties, click the name on the list,
and then Properties.
Related topics
• Users and Passwords on page 117
• Add User Account on page 160
Configure Statusbar
The Configure Statusbar dialog is opened when you click the right mouse button on
the Status Bar.
Purpose
The Configure Statusbar dialog is used to select which sensor information to display
on the Status bar.
Description
Position the cursor over the Status Bar, and
right-click to open the dialog. Check the boxes to
enable or disable the information you wish to see.
When all information has been enabled, and if the relevant sensors have been connected
to the EK60, the Status Bar will provide the following information (from left):
• Current messages
• Current vessel pitch in degrees
• Current vessel roll in degrees
• Current vessel heave in meters
• Event number
• Current heading
• Current vessel speed in knots
• Distance in nautical miles or meters
164692/D
161
Simrad EK60
• Geographical position
• Recording status
• Date and time
Choose to display local or GMT time using the Local Time function on the Options
menu.
• Warning messages
The Warnings field on the far right side of the status bar is a button. When a warning
has been issued, the button will be lit with a colour and a text indicating the nature of
the message. To investigate further, click the button.
Related topics
• Status Bar on page 53
• Warnings on page 165
• Local Time on page 92
EK500 Datagram
The EK500 Datagram dialog is opened from the File Output and Ethernet Output dialogs.
Purpose
The EK500 Datagram dialog is used to specify which EK500 datagrams to output. Note
that changes made in this dialog will have effects on both Ethernet and file outputs
of EK500 data.
Description
The EK500 Datagram dialog is used to set up the export data properties.
The dialog offers three tabs to set up the parameters.
1
Datagram
Use this tab to specify which datagrams to output to file and/or on the Ethernet line.
2
Range
This tab allows you to open the Surface Range and Bottom Range dialogs to specify
the vertical range for the Echogram, Echo Trace and Sample Data datagrams.
3
Echogram
Use this tab to specify the number of surface and bottom values for the Echogram
datagrams.
Related topics
• File Output on page 123
• Ethernet Output on page 127
• Single Target Detection on page 141
• Surface Range on page 151
• Bottom Range on page 149
162
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
EK500 Datagram; Datagram
Use this tab to specify which datagrams to
output to file and/or on the Ethernet line.
Parameters
1
Datagram
A list of all available output
datagrams are listed. Click to enable
individual outputs.
For correct output to the Olex system,
the following datagrams must be
enabled:
• Parameter
• Echogram
2
Sample Data
Click to include angle, power, sound velocity and target strength data.
3
Echo Trace Setup
Click this button to specify parameters for the Echo Trace datagram. The button
opens the Single Target Detection dialog.
The Single Target Detection dialog is used to set the operational parameters for
detecting single targets.
→ Single Target Detection on page 141
EK500 Datagram; Range
This tab allows you to open the Surface
Range and Bottom Range dialogs to specify
the vertical range for the Echogram, Echo
Trace and Sample Data datagrams.
Parameters
1
Surface Range
Click this button to choose the surface
range for the datagrams. The button
opens the Surface Range dialog.
The Surface Range dialog is used to
specify the vertical depth range for
the Echogram view in surface related echograms.
→ Surface Range on page 151
164692/D
163
Simrad EK60
2
Bottom Range
Click this button to choose the bottom range for the datagrams. The button opens
the Bottom Range dialog.
The Bottom Range dialog is used to specify the vertical depth range for the
Echogram view in bottom related echograms.
→ Bottom Range on page 149
EK500 Datagram; Echogram
Use this tab to specify the number
of surface and bottom values for the
Echogram datagrams.
Parameters
1
No. of Surface Values
Select the number of echogram
samples to export in the pelagic part
of the echogram.
For correct output to the Olex system,
set this parameter to 500.
2
No. of Bottom Values
Select the number of echogram samples to export in the bottom part of the echogram.
For correct output to the Olex system, set this parameter to 200.
3
TVG Type
Specify the TVG type for the data in the Echogram datagram.
• Echogram; Type tab on page 145
• TVG gain on page 230
Errors
The Errors and Warnings dialogs are opened by clicking the Errors/Warnings button
on the Status Bar.
Purpose
The Errors and Warnings dialogs allow you to read and acknowledge messages from
the EK60.
164
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Description
Messages from the EK60 can be related to any
type of hardware or software errors, and even
events related to operational conditions.
A new message is flagged by means of the
Errors/Warnings button on the Status Bar.
The same dialog is also used with other
message types presented by the EK60.
Warnings are indicated with a yellow button on
the Status Bar, while errors are indicated with a
red button. Click the button to open the dialog.
The messages are divided into the following
types related to their importance.
The following message types are available.
1
Errors: These are fatal errors. Operation
of the EK60 can not continue.
2
Warnings: These are operation warnings.
Parameters
1
Current Message
The text in a message may be longer than the message listing may show. To read the
complete message, click on it. The text will be copied into the bottom text field.
2
Acknowledge
Click to acknowledge the currently selected message.
3
Delete
Click to delete the currently selected message.
4
Delete All
Click to delete all new messages in the current list.
Related topics
• Status Bar on page 53
• Errors on page 164
• Warnings on page 165
Warnings
The Errors and Warnings dialogs are opened by clicking the Errors/Warnings button
on the Status Bar.
Purpose
The Errors and Warnings dialogs allow you to read and acknowledge messages from
the EK60.
164692/D
165
Simrad EK60
Description
Messages from the EK60 can be related to any
type of hardware or software errors, and even
events related to operational conditions.
A new message is flagged by means of the
Errors/Warnings button on the Status Bar.
The same dialog is also used with other
message types presented by the EK60.
Warnings are indicated with a yellow button on
the Status Bar, while errors are indicated with a
red button. Click the button to open the dialog.
The messages are divided into the following
types related to their importance.
The following message types are available.
1
Errors: These are fatal errors. Operation
of the EK60 can not continue.
2
Warnings: These are operation warnings.
Parameters
1
Current Message
The text in a message may be longer than the message listing may show. To read the
complete message, click on it. The text will be copied into the bottom text field.
2
Acknowledge
Click to acknowledge the currently selected message.
3
Delete
Click to delete the currently selected message.
4
Delete All
Click to delete all new messages in the current list.
Related topics
• Status Bar on page 53
• Errors on page 164
• Warnings on page 165
HAC Datagram
The HAC Datagram dialog is opened from the File Output dialog.
Purpose
Use the HAC Datagram dialog to set up which HAC datagrams to be exported.
166
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Description
HAC is a data exchange format defined
by ICES (International Council for the
Exploration of the Sea). It is a standard
format for raw and edited hydroacoustic
data. The information is organised in
tuples. A tuple is a labelled group of bytes
encapsulating special type of information
in the HAC format. They forms the basic
structure of the format, allows versatility,
and makes it possible to perform upgrades.
Tuples belongs to tuple families or classes
that groups the information by themes. Unique numbers, varying from 0 to 65535,
identify each tuple.
For more information, see http://www.ices.dk.
The following HAC tuples are currently supported by the Simrad EK60:
• HAC signature (65535)
• End of file (65534)
• Standard position (20)
• Simrad EK60 echo sounder (210)
• Simrad EK60 channel (2100)
• Ping U-16 (10030)
• Ping U-16-angles (10031)
• Single targets (10090)
Parameters
1
Range
Click to open the Surface Range dialog. The range specified is the valid range for
all ping and single targets HAC data.
→ Surface Range on page 151
2
Navigation
Click to enable export of position data.
3
Sample data:
Click to select which sample data types to export: angle, power, sound velocity
or target strength.
4
Single target data:
• Single Target: Click to enable export of single target data.
• Single Target Detection: Click this button to define the single target detection
properties. The Single Target Detection dialog opens.
– Single Target Detection on page 141
164692/D
167
Simrad EK60
Related topics
• File Output on page 123
• Single Target Detection on page 141
• Surface Range on page 151
LAN Port Setup
The LAN Port Setup dialog is accessed from the Port Management dialog as well as from
other dialogs handling Ethernet communication lines.
Purpose
The LAN Port Setup dialog allows you to define the parameters for Ethernet (Local
Area Network (LAN)) communication with external sensors (measuring devices) or
peripheral systems.
Description
Ethernet (Local Area Network (LAN))
communication is an efficient way to
connect to external sensors, such as a
global positioning system (GPS) to receive
navigational data.
In order for this communication port
to work, the parameters must be set up
properly.
Parameters
1
Local IP Address
This is the Internet Protocol (IP) address of the local Ethernet interface board.
In most cases, each Ethernet board has a unique IP address, even when an interface
board supports multiple sockets. If you have more than one interface board, you are
provided with a list of the available addresses.
2
Communication mode
Choose Broadcast or Point-to-Point.
Broadcast mode enables data to be sent from the EK60 to any number of remote
systems. Data is thereby only transmitted to these systems. The remote systems
receive the data, but the EK60 does not receive any reply or acknowledgement
from them.
Point-to-Point mode implies that the EK60 is physically connected only to one
single remote system. The value of such a permanent point-to-point network is
unimpeded communications between the two EK60 and the remote system. A
complete two-way communication system is then used.
168
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
3
Remote IP Address
Select the Internet Protocol (IP) address for the remote computer.
If the data communication is set up to receive data only, this parameter is
not required. If you wish to set up an output for broadcast, define IP address
255.255.255.255. This is the default setting.
If you use point-to-point communication in a closed network, you need to enter
the remote IP address manually.
4
Remote port (UDP)
Specify the local network port. The EK60 uses this network port to transmit
information. The application on the remote computer will “listen” to this port
number.
Related topics
• Annotation on page 112
• Navigation on page 101
• Depth Output on page 128
• Port Management on page 118
Serial Port Setup
The Serial Port Setup dialog is accessed from the Port Management dialog as well as
from other dialogs handling serial lines.
Purpose
The Serial Port Setup dialog allows you to define the parameters for serial communication.
Description
Serial ports are still a very common method
for interface between maritime systems.
It is very important that any serial line
between the EK60 and any external system is
setup up correctly with identical parameters
at each end.
The NMEA[1] standard for serial communication defines standard parameters for such
interfaces.
Parameters
1
COM port
This text fields identifies the current communication port on the computer. You
can not change this information.
1.
“NMEA” means National Marine Electronics Association.
information.
164692/D
See http://www.nmea.org for more
169
Simrad EK60
2
Baud rate
Use this entry to specify the baudrate (“speed”) for the serial communication.
Standard baudrate defined for NMEA communication is 4800 baud.
3
Data bits
Use this entry to specify the number of data bits for the serial communication.
Standard number of data bits defined for NMEA communication is 8.
4
Parity
Use this entry to specify the parity for the serial communication.
Standard parity defined for NMEA communication is None.
Related topics
• Annotation on page 112
• Navigation on page 101
• Depth Output on page 128
• Port Management on page 118
Port Monitor
The Port Monitor dialog is opened from the Port Monitor button in the Port Management
dialog.
Purpose
The Port Monitor dialog allows you to study the communication stream on the chosen
serial or Ethernet (Local Area Network (LAN)) port.
170
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Description
The Port Monitor dialog provides
one text field for incoming messages
(Rx data), and one for outgoing (Tx
data). Use these fields and your own
knowledge of the data communication
to investigate the telegrams.
Note that the Port Monitor dialog
is a tool for debugging purposes. It
is neither required nor intended for
normal operation of the EK60.
Parameters
1
Tx data
This text window displays the
data communication transmitted
out from the EK60.
2
Rx data
This text window is used to
display the data communication
received by the EK60 from
external sensors (measuring
devices) or peripheral systems.
3
Auto update
When this box is selected, the field is constantly updated with new information. If
you wish to freeze the information for further investigation, deselect to disable the
automatic update.
4
Hex display
When this box is selected, the information in the text field is shown in hexadecimal
format.
5
Current port
If you wish to change your attention to a different serial or LAN port, you can
choose the communication port here instead of returning to the I/O Setup dialog.
6
Always on top
This function places the Port Monitor dialog on the top of all other dialogs and
system presentations on your desktop.
Related topics
• Port Management on page 118
• Serial Port Setup on page 169
• LAN Port Setup on page 168
164692/D
171
Simrad EK60
Transducer Parameters
The Transducer Parameters dialog is opened from the button in the Transceiver
Installation dialog.
Purpose
The Transducer Parameters dialog allows you to manually modify key transducer
parameters.
Description
This functionality is for
advanced users only!
Changing the transducer
name creates a new
transducer definition in
the trlist.ini file.
After creating a new
transducer, you must
disconnect the channel
with the transducer,
and the reconnect it.
Refer to the operational
procedures.
→ Disconnecting a
frequency channel
on page 26
Related topics
• Disconnecting a frequency channel on page 26
• Transceiver Installation on page 96
Analog Motion Sensor Setup
The Analog Motion Sensor Setup dialog is opened when you click the Setup button in the
Motion dialog after selecting motion input from a General Purpose Transceiver (GPT). (If
the Setup button is unavailable, click Normal →Normal Operation first to start the EK60.)
Purpose
The Analog Motion Sensor Setup dialog allows you to define the sensitivity and offset
values for the analogue motion input.
172
164692/D
Functions and dialogs
Description
The Analog Motion Sensor Setup provides
sensitivity and offset values for heave, roll
and pitch. Each parameter can be selected
individually.
Example 5
Offset parameters
If the sensor outputs a fixed voltage
when the vessel is level and not
moving, you can adjust the offset so
that the EK60 accepts this input as the “normal” value.
Parameters
1
Heave Voltage Sensitivity
Adjust the sensitivity from the sensor.
2
Heave Voltage Offset
Adjust the offset level so that any voltage from the sensor when the vessel is level
and not moving is accepted by the EK60 as the “normal” level”.
3
Roll Voltage Sensitivity
Adjust the sensitivity from the sensor.
4
Roll Voltage Offset
Adjust the offset level so that any voltage from the sensor when the vessel is level
and not moving is accepted by the EK60 as the “normal” level”.
5
Pitch Voltage Sensitivity
Adjust the sensitivity from the sensor.
6
Pitch Voltage Offset
Adjust the offset level so that any voltage from the sensor when the vessel is level
and not moving is accepted by the EK60 as the “normal” level”.
Related topics
• Normal Operation on page 76
• Motion on page 107
164692/D
173
Simrad EK60
Telegram formats
This chapter details the standard NMEA, third party and proprietary Simrad telegrams,
as well as – if applicable – dedicated file formats for data transfer.
According to their web site, the National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) is the
unifying force behind the entire marine electronics industry, bringing together all aspects
of the industry for the betterment of all in our business.
All NMEA, third party and proprietary telegrams available are not described here, only
those used by the EK60. If the specifications here differ from the original specifications
published by NMEA, the specifications issued by NMEA must be regarded as the
correct version.
Topics
• About the NMEA telegram format on page 174
• Specification of NMEA telegrams on page 177
• Proprietary telegrams and formats on page 185
• Proprietary third party telegrams and formats on page 193
Related topics
• http://www.nmea.org.
About the NMEA telegram format
The Simrad EK60 can send and receive information to and from several different
peripherals. All transmissions take place as telegrams with data sentences. Each
telegram has a defined format and length.
The NMEA 0183 standard is the most common protocol used to receive and transmit data
to and from peripheral sensors. A parametric sentence structure is used for all NMEA
data. The sentence start with a “$” delimiter, and represent the majority of approved
sentences defined by the standard. This sentence structure, with delimited and defined
data files, is the preferred method for conveying information.
For more information about the NMEA standard, the format and the data sentences, refer
to their official publications. Their document NMEA 1083 - Standard for interfacing
marine electronic devices explains the formats in detail. The document can be obtained
from http://www.nmea.org.
174
164692/D
Telegram formats
Topics
• National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) on page 175
• NMEA telegram principles on page 175
• Standard NMEA 0183 communication parameters on page 175
• NMEA sentence structure on page 176
National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA)
The National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) has defined communication
standards for maritime electronic equipment, and the EK60 echo sounder conforms to
these standards. The most common standard is NMEA 0183, and the National Marine
Electronics Association describes it as follows:
The NMEA 0183 Interface Standard defines electrical signal requirements, data
transmission protocol and time, and specific sentence formats for a 4800 baud serial
data bus. Each bus may have only one talker but many listeners.
— National Marine Electronics Association
For more information about the National Marine Electronics Association and the NMEA
0183 standard, refer to the organization's web site at http://www.nmea.org.
NMEA telegram principles
To move information between two electronic units, the data are collected in telegrams.
The content (protocol) of each telegram is defined by the NMEA standard, and several
telegram types exist to allow different type of data to be distributed.
The phrase datagram is also frequently used about this communication method.
Unless you wish to write your own software, you do not need to know how these
telegrams are designed. However, whenever you set up equipment interfaces, you need
to ensure that each system on your communication line is set up to send and receive the
same telegram. The standard allows one system to send data (a “talker") and several
others to receive data simultaneously ("listeners") on the same line. Therefore, you must
ensure that all products receiving data on a communication line is set up to receive the
same telegram(s) that the transmitting product provides.
Standard NMEA 0183 communication parameters
The communication parameters defined for NMEA 0183 are:
• Baudrate: 4800 bits per second
• Data bits: 8
• Parity: None
• Stop bits: One
Some instruments will also offer other parameters and/or choices.
164692/D
175
Simrad EK60
NMEA sentence structure
The following provides a summary explanation of the approved parametric sentence
structure.
$aaccc,c—c*hh<CR><LF>
1
“$”: Start of sentence (Hex: 24).
2
aaccc: Address field. The first two characters (aa) identifies the Talker ID, while the
last three characters are the Sentence formatter mnemonic code identifying the data
type and the string format of the successive fields.
3
“,”: Field delimiter (Hex: 2C). This character starts each field except the address
and checksum fields. If it is followed by a null field, it is all that remains to indicate
no data in the field.
4
c—c: Data sentence block. This is a series of data fields containing all the data
to be transmitted. The data field sentence is fixed and identified by the Sentence
formatter in the address field. Data fields may be of variable lengths, and they are
preceded by the Field delimiter.
5
“*”: Checksum delimiter (Hex: 2A). This delimiter follows the last field of the
sentence, and indicates that the following two alphanumerical characters contain
the checksum.
6
hh: Checksum
7
<CR><LF>: Terminates sentence
Proprietary telegrams
In some proprietary telegrams received from other Simrad equipment, the $ character is
replaced by the @ character. The checksum field may then not be in use.
176
164692/D
Telegram formats
Specification of NMEA telegrams
All standard NMEA telegrams supported by the EK60 are specified here. The
information is extracted from the original NMEA specifications. If additional details
about the individual telegram formats are required, see the original source file.
Topics
• DBS Depth below surface on page 177
• DBT Depth below transducer on page 178
• DPT Depth on page 178
• GGA Global positioning system fix data on page 179
• GLL Geographical position latitude/longitude on page 179
• HDT Heading, true on page 181
• VBW Dual ground and water speed on page 182
• VHW Water speed and heading on page 183
• VLW Dual ground/water distance on page 183
• VTG Course over ground & ground speed on page 183
DBS Depth below surface
This telegram provides the current depth from the surface. The telegram is no longer
recommended for use in new designs.
It is often replaced by the DPT telegram.
Format
$--DBS,x.x,f,y.y,M,z.z,F*hh<CR><LF>
Format description
1
– – = talker identifier
2
DBS = telegram identifier
3
x.x,f = depth below surface in feet
4
y.y,M = depth below surface in meters
5
z.z,F = depth below surface in fathoms
Related topics
• Depth Output on page 128
164692/D
177
Simrad EK60
DBT Depth below transducer
This telegram provides the water depth referenced to the transducer.
Format
$--DBT,x.x,f,y.y,M,z.z,F*hh<CR><LF>
Format description
1
– – = talker identifier
2
DBT = telegram identifier
3
x.x,f = water depth below transducer in feet
4
y.y,M = water depth below transducer in meters
5
z.z,F = water depth below transducer in fathoms
Related topics
• Depth Output on page 128
DPT Depth
This telegram contains water depth relative to the transducer and offset of the measuring
transducer. Positive offset numbers provide the distance from the transducer to the
water line. Negative offset numbers provide the distance from the transducer to the
part of the keel of interest.
For additional details, refer to the NMEA standard.
Format
$--DPT,x.x,y.y,z.z*hh<CR><LF>
Format description
1
– – = talker identifier
2
DPT = telegram identifier
3
x.x = water depth, in meters, relative to the transducer
4
y.y = offset, in meters, from the transducer
5
z.z = maximum range scale in use
Related topics
• Depth Output on page 128
178
164692/D
Telegram formats
GGA Global positioning system fix data
This telegram contains time, position and fix related data from a global positioning
system (GPS).
Format
$--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,
x,zz,d.d,a.a,M,g.g,M,r.r,cccc*hh<CR><LF>
Format description
1 – – = talker identifier
2 GGA = telegram identifier
3 hhmmss.ss = coordinated universal time (UTC) of position
4 llll.ll = latitude north/south, position in degrees, minutes and hundredths.
5 a = North/South. Characters N (North) or S (South) identifies the bearing.
6 yyyyy.yy = longitude east/west, position in degrees, minutes and hundredths.
7 a = West/East. Characters W (West) or E (East) identifies the bearing.
8 x = GPS quality indicator (refer to the NMEA standard for further details)
9 zz = number of satellites in use, 00 to 12, may be different from the number in view
10 d.d = horizontal dilution of precision
11 a.a,M = altitude related to mean sea level (geoid) in meters
12 g.g,M = geoidal separation in meters
13 r.r = age of differential GPS data
14 cccc = differential reference station identification, 0000 to 1023
Related topics
• Navigation; Position tab on page 102
GLL Geographical position latitude/longitude
This telegram is used to transfer latitude and longitude of vessel position, time of position
fix and status from a global positioning system (GPS).
Format
$--GLL,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,
hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
Format description
1 – – = talker identifier
2 GLL = telegram identifier.
3 llll.ll = latitude north/south, position in degrees, minutes and hundredths. Characters
N (North) or S (South) identifies the bearing.
4 a = North/South. Characters N (North) or S (South) identifies the bearing.
164692/D
179
Simrad EK60
5
yyyyy.yy,a = longitude east/west, position in degrees, minutes and hundredths.
6
a = West/East. Characters W (West) or E (East) identifies the bearing.
7
hhmmss.ss = coordinated universal time (UTC) of position.
8
A = status, characters A (data valid) or V (data not valid) are used.
9
a = mode indicator.
Related topics
• Navigation; Position tab on page 102
HDG Heading, deviation and variation
This telegram contains the heading from a magnetic sensor, which if corrected for
deviation will produce magnetic heading, which if offset by variation will provide true
heading.
Format
$--HDG,x.x,z.z,a,r.r,a*hh<CR><LF>
Heading conversions
To obtain magnetic heading: Add easterly deviation (E) to magnetic sensor reading, or
subtract westerly deviation (W) from magnetic sensor reading.
To obtain true heading: Add easterly variation (E) to magnetic heading, or subtract
westerly variation (W) from magnetic heading.
Format description
1
– – = talker identifier
2
HDG = telegram identifier
3
x.x = magnetic sensor heading, degrees
4
z.z,a = magnetic deviation, degrees east/west
5
r.r,a = magnetic variation, degrees east/west
Related topics
• Navigation; Heading tab on page 106
180
164692/D
Telegram formats
HDM Heading, magnetic
This telegram contains vessel heading in degrees magnetic. The telegram is no longer
recommended for use in new designs.
It is often replaced by the HDG telegram.
Format
$--HDM,x.x,M*hh<CR><LF>
Format description
1 – – = talker identifier
2 HDM = telegram identifier
3 x.x = heading in degrees, magnetic
Related topics
• Navigation; Heading tab on page 106
HDT Heading, true
This telegram is used to transfer heading information from a gyro.
Format
$--HDT,x.x,T*hh<CR><LF>
Format description
1 – – = talker identifier
2 HDT = telegram identifier
3 x.x,T = heading, degrees true
Related topics
• Navigation; Heading tab on page 106
RMC Recommended minimum specific GNSS data
This telegram contains time, date, position, course and speed data provided by a global
navigation satellite system (GNSS) receiver.
Format
$--RMC,hhmmss.ss,A,llll.ll,a,yyyyy.yy,a,
x.x,z.z,ddmmyy,r.r,a,a*hh<CR><LF>
Format description
1 – – = talker identifier
2 RMC = telegram identifier
3 hhmmss.ss = coordinated universal time (UTC) of position fix
164692/D
181
Simrad EK60
4
A = status, characters A (data valid) or V (Navigation receiver warning) are used.
5
llll.ll,a = latitude nort/south. Characters N (North) or S (South) identifies the bearing.
6
yyyyy.yy.a = longitude east/west. Characters E (East) or W (West) identifies the
bearing.
7
x.x = speed over ground, knots
8
z.z = course over ground, degrees true
9
ddmmyy = date
10 r.r,a = magnetic variation, degrees east/west. Characters E (East) or W (West)
identifies the bearing.
11 a = mode indicator
Related topics
• Navigation; Position tab on page 102
• Navigation; Speed tab on page 103
VBW Dual ground and water speed
This telegram contains water referenced and ground referenced speed data.
Format
$--VBW,x.x,z.z,A,r.r,q.q,A,p.p,A,
c.c,A*hh<CR><LF>
Format description
1
– – = talker identifier
2
VBW = telegram identifier
3
x.x = longitude water speed, knots
4
z.z = transverse water speed, knots
5
A = status, water speed, characters A (data valid) or V (data not valid) are used.
6
r.r = longitudinal ground speed, knots
7
q.q = transverse ground speed, knots
8
A = status, ground speed, characters A (data valid) or V (data not valid) are used.
9
p.p = stern transverse water speed, knots
10 A = status, stern water speed, characters A (data valid) or V (data not valid) are used.
11 c.c = stern transverse ground speed, knots
12 A = status, stern ground speed, characters A (data valid) or V (data not valid) are
used.
Related topics
• Navigation; Speed tab on page 103
182
164692/D
Telegram formats
VHW Water speed and heading
This telegram contains the compass heading to which the vessel points and the speed of
the vessel relative to the water.
Format
$--VHW,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K*hh<CR><LF>
Format description
1 – – = talker identifier
2 VHW = telegram identifier
3 x.x,T = heading, degrees true
4 x.x,M = heading, degrees magnetic
5 x.x,N = speed relative to water, knots, resolution 0.1
6 x.x,K = speed relative to water, km/hr, resolution 0.1
Related topics
• Navigation; Heading tab on page 106
• Navigation; Speed tab on page 103
VLW Dual ground/water distance
This telegram contains the distance travelled relative to the water and over the ground.
Format
$--VLW,x.x,N,y.y,N,z.z,N,g.g,N*hh<CR><LF>
Format description
1 – – = talker identifier
2 VLW = telegram identifier
3 x.x,N = total cumulative water distance, nautical miles.
4 y.y,N = water distance since reset, nautical miles.
5 z.z,N = total cumulative ground distance, nautical miles.
6 g.g,N = ground distance since reset, nautical miles.
Related topics
• Navigation; Distance tab on page 104
VTG Course over ground & ground speed
This telegram contains the actual course and speed relative to the ground.
Format
$--VTG,x.x,T,y.y,M,z.z,N,g.g,K,a*hh<CR><LF>
164692/D
183
Simrad EK60
Format description
1
– – = talker identifier
2
VTG = telegram identifier
3
x.x,T = course over ground, degrees true
4
y.y,M = course over ground, degrees magnetic
5
z.z,N = speed over ground, knots, resolution 0.1
6
g.g,K = speed over ground, km/hr, resolution 0.1
7
a = mode indicator
Related topics
• Navigation; Distance tab on page 104
184
164692/D
Telegram formats
Proprietary telegrams and formats
These are the proprietary telegrams supported by the EK60. These telegram formats
have all been defined by Simrad. The telegrams are listed in alphabetical order.
Topics
• Simrad EK500 Depth telegram on page 185
• Kongsberg EM Attitude 1000 on page 186
• Kongsberg EM Attitude 3000 on page 187
• DBS Depth of trawl below surface on page 188
• HFB Trawl headrope to footrope and bottom on page 188
• PSIMP-D PI Sensor data on page 188
• PSIMDHB Bottom hardness and biomass on page 190
• Simrad Sounder/TSS1 Motion protocol on page 190
• Simrad ATS Annotation on page 192
Simrad EK500 Depth telegram
This proprietary Simrad telegram was defined for the EK500 scientific echo sounder.
It provides the current depth from three channels, as well as the bottom surface
backscattering strength and the athwartships bottom slope. This telegram has be defined
for output on either a serial line or a local area network Ethernet connection.
Serial line format
D#,hhmmsstt,x.x,y.y,t,s.s<CR><LF>
Serial line format description
1 D# = identifier, can be D1, D2 or D3 for channels 1, 2 or 3.
2 hhmmsstt = current time; hour, minute, second and hundredth of second
3 x.x = detected bottom depth in meters
4 y.y = bottom surface backscattering strength in dB
5 t = transducer number
6 s,s = athwartships bottom slope in degrees
Ethernet format
The Ethernet line output is specified using a “C” programming language structure. Note
that this format does not include carriage return and line feed characters at the end of
the telegram.
struct Depth {
char Header[2];
char Separator1[1];
char Time[8];
char Separator1[2];
float Depth[4];
float Ss[4];
164692/D
185
Simrad EK60
long TransducerNumber[4];
float AthwartShips;
};
Ethernet format description
1 Header# = can be D1, D2 or D3 for channels 1, 2 or 3.
2 Separator = “,”
3 Time = current time; hour, minute, second and hundredth of second
4 Depth = detected bottom depth in meters
5 Ss = bottom surface backscattering strength in dB
6 TransducerNumber = transducer number
7 AthwartShips = athwartships bottom slope in degrees
Kongsberg EM Attitude 1000
This proprietary Kongsberg EM Attitude 1000 binary telegram consists of a fixed length
message with 10 bytes.
It is defined as follows:
• Byte 1: Sync byte 1 = 00h
• Byte 2: Sync byte 2 = 90h
• Byte 3: Roll LSB
• Byte 4: Roll MSB
• Byte 5: Pitch LSB
• Byte 6: Pitch MSB
• Byte 7: Heave LSB
• Byte 8: Heave MSB
• Byte 9: Heading LSB
• Byte 10: Heading MSB
LSB = least significant byte, MSB = most significant byte.
1 All data are in 2’s complement binary, with 0.01° resolution for roll, pitch and
heading, and 1 cm resolution for heave.
• Roll is positive with port side up with ±179.99° valid range
• Pitch is positive with bow up with ±179.99° valid range
• Heave is positive up with ±9.99 m valid range
• Heading is positive clockwise with 0 to 359.99° valid range
2 Non-valid data are assumed when a value is outside the valid range.
3 You can define how roll is assumed to be measured, either with respect to the
horizontal plane (the Hippy 120 or TSS convention), or to the plane tilted by the
given pitch angle (i.e. as a rotation angle around the pitch tilted forward pointing
x-axis). The latter convention (called Tate-Bryant in the POS/MV documentation)
186
164692/D
Telegram formats
4
5
is used inside the system in all data displays and in logged data (a transformation is
applied if the roll is given with respect to the horizontal).
Note that heave is displayed and logged as positive downwards (the sign is
changed). Heave is corrected for roll and pitch.
This format was originally designed for use with the EM 950 and the EM 1000
multibeam echo sounders with the first synchronisation byte always assumed to be
zero. The sensor manufacturers was then requested to include sensor status in the
format using the first synchronisation byte for this purpose. With this additional
information added, the datagram format is known as Kongsberg EM Attitude 3000.
Kongsberg EM Attitude 3000
This proprietary Kongsberg binary telegram consists of a fixed length 10-bytes message.
It is defined as follows:
• Byte 1: Sync byte 1 = 00h, or Sensor status = 90h-AFh
• Byte 2: Sync byte 2 = 90h
• Byte 3: Roll LSB
• Byte 4: Roll MSB
• Byte 5: Pitch LSB
• Byte 6: Pitch MSB
• Byte 7: Heave LSB
• Byte 8: Heave MSB
• Byte 9: Heading LSB
• Byte 10: Heading MSB
LSB = least significant byte, MSB = most significant byte.
1 All data are in 2’s complement binary, with 0.01° resolution for roll, pitch and
heading, and 1 cm resolution for heave.
• Roll is positive with port side up with ±179.99° valid range
• Pitch is positive with bow up with ±179.99° valid range
• Heave is positive up with ±9.99 m valid range
• Heading is positive clockwise with 0 to 359.99° valid range
Non-valid data are assumed when a value is outside the valid range.
2 You can define how roll is assumed to be measured, either with respect to the
horizontal plane (the Hippy 120 or TSS convention), or to the plane tilted by the
given pitch angle (i.e. as a rotation angle around the pitch tilted forward pointing
x-axis). The latter convention (called Tate-Bryant in the POS/MV documentation) is
used inside the system in all data displays and in logged data (a transformation is
applied if the roll is given with respect to the horizontal).
3 Note that heave is displayed and logged as positive downwards (the sign is changed)
including roll and pitch induced lever arm translation to the system’s transmit
transducer.
164692/D
187
Simrad EK60
4
This format has previously been used with the EM 950 and the EM 1000 with the
first synchronisation byte always assumed to be zero (Datagram “Kongsberg EM
Attitude 1000”). The sensor manufacturers have been requested to include sensor
status in the format using the first synchronisation byte for this purpose.
It is thus assumed that:
• 90h in the first byte indicates a valid measurement with full accuracy
• any value from 91h to 99h indicates valid data with reduced accuracy (decreasing
accuracy with increasing number)
• any value from 9Ah to 9Fh indicates non-valid data but normal operation (for
example configuration or calibration mode)
• and any value from A0h to AFh indicates a sensor error status
DBS Depth of trawl below surface
This proprietary Simrad telegram contains the depth of the trawl sensor.
Format
@IIDBS,,,x.x,M,,<CR><LF>
Format description
1
II = talker identifier (mandatory)
2
DBS = telegram identifier
3
x.x,M = depth in meters (0 to 2000)
HFB Trawl headrope to footrope and bottom
This proprietary Simrad telegram contains the distance from the headrope to the
footrope, and from the footrope to the bottom.
Format
@IIHFB,x.x,M,y.y,M<CR><LF>
Format description
1
II = talker identifier (mandatory)
2
HFB = telegram identifier
3
x.x,M = distance from headrope to footrope, meters
4
y.y, M = distance from footrope to bottom, meters
PSIMP-D PI Sensor data
This proprietary Simrad telegram contains the type and configuration of PS and PI
sensors used by the external PI catch monitoring system.
188
164692/D
Telegram formats
Note
This description is not complete. For further information, contact Simrad.
Format
$PSIMP,D,tt,dd,M,U,S,C,V,Cr,Q,In,SL,NL,G,
Cb,error*chksum<CR><LF>
Format description
1
PS = Talker identifier (mandatory)
2
IMP = Telegram identifier
3
D = Sentence specifier
4
tt = Time of day
5
dd = Current date
6
M = Measurement type:
• D = Depth
• T = Temperature
• C = Catch
• B = Bottom
• N = No sensor
• M = Marker
7
U = unit; M, f or F for depth measurements, C or F for temperature measurements
8
S = source; number (1, 2 or 3) of the sensor providing the current data values
9
C = channel; the number (1 to 30) of the communication channel for the current
data source
10 V = value; the magnitude of the current sensor measurement
11 Cr = change rate; the magnitude of the current depth or temperature measurement
12 Q = quality:
• 0 = No connection between the sensor and the receiver
• 1 = One or two telemetry pulses are lost, current value is predicted
• 2 = The current data value is reliable
13 In = interference:
• 0 = No interference
• 1 = Interference detected
14 SL = signal level – the signal level of the telemetry pulse, measured in dB // 1 µPa
15 NL = noise level – the average noise level of the current channel, measured in dB
// 1 µPa
16 G = the current gain; 0, 20 or 40 dB.
164692/D
189
Simrad EK60
17 Cb = cable quality:
• 0 = cable is not connected
• 1 = cable is OK
• 2 = a short circuit, or the hydrophone current is too large
18 error = error detected – 0 when no error is detected, a number >0 indicates an error
condition
19 chksum = The checksum field consists of a "*" and two hex digits representing the
exclusive OR of all characters between, but not including, the "$" and "*" characters
PSIMDHB Bottom hardness and biomass
This proprietary Simrad telegram contains the bottom hardness and biomass as calculated
by an echo sounder.
Format
$PSIMDHB,hhmmss.ss,t,f,KHZ,x.x,M,y.y,DB,z.z,,,<CR><LF>
Format description
1
$P = talker identifier (mandatory)
2
SIM = Simrad talker ID
3
DHB = coordinated universal time (UTC)
4
hhmmss.ss = time
5
t = transducer number
6
f,KHZ = echo sounder frequency in kHz
7
x.x,M = detected bottom depth in meters. Given as DBS (depth below surface),
assuming proper transducer draft has been entered.
8
y.y,DB = bottom surface hardness in dB
9
z.z = relative biomass density in m²/nmi² (NASC) (sA)
NASC means Nautical Area Scattering Coefficient. This is the format (sA m²/nmi²)
we provide the biomass data.
10 spare1 = spare for future expansions
11 spare2 = spare for future expansions
Simrad Sounder/TSS1 Motion protocol
This proprietary Simrad Sounder/TSS1 protocol may be the most common interface for
heave, roll and pitch compensation. When you select this protocol, the number of sensor
variables is fixed, and there is no token associated with it. However, baud rate and output
rate may be adjusted to fit your needs. The format is based on ASCII characters, the
datagrams have fixed length, and it is terminated with a carriage return and line feed.
190
164692/D
Telegram formats
The definition of the attitude angles in this format is different from the Euler angles
definition used elsewhere. The difference appears in the roll angle, where:
Rollechosounder = arcsin sin(Roll
Euler
) • cos(Pitch
Euler
)
Format
:aabbbb shhhhxsrrrr spppp<cr><lf>
Format description
1
aa = sway – two characters hex number with sway acceleration, in 0.03835 m/ss
units
2
bbbb = heave – four characters hex number with heave acceleration, in 0.000625
m/ss units
3
s = a single character providing a “space” character if the value is positive, or a
“–” character if it is negative
4
hhhh = heave – four characters decimal number with heave position in centimetres,
positive up
5
x = status character:
• U = Unaided mode and stable data. The sensor operates without external input
data.
• u = Unaided mode but unstable data. The sensor is without external input data,
but the data from the sensor is unstable. A probable cause for this is the lack of
alignment after the sensor has been switched on restarted. The alignment period
from a power recycle is normally approximately five minutes.
• G = Speed aided mode and stable data. The sensor operates with external input
of speed data.
• g = Speed aided mode but unstable data. The sensor operates with external input
of speed data, but the data from the sensor is unstable. A probable cause for this
is the lack of alignment after the sensor has been switched on restarted, or a
failure in the speed data input.
• H = Heading aided mode and stable data. The sensor operates with external
input of heading data.
• h = Heading aided mode but unstable data. The sensor operates with external
input of heading data, but the data from the sensor is unstable. A probable cause
for this is the lack of alignment after the sensor has been switched on restarted,
or a failure in the heading data input.
• F = Full aided mode and stable data. The sensor operates with external input of
both speed and heading data.
• f = Full aided mode but unstable data. The sensor operates with external input
of heading and speed data, but the data from the sensor is unstable. A probable
cause for this is the lack of alignment after the sensor has been switched on
restarted, or a failure in the heading and/or speed data input.
164692/D
191
Simrad EK60
6
s = a single character providing a “space” character if the value is positive, or a
“–” character if it is negative
7
rrrr = roll – four character decimal number with roll angle in hundreds of a degree
8
s = a single character providing a “space” character if the value is positive, or a
“–” character if it is negative
9
pppp = pitch – four character decimal number with pitch angle in hundreds of
a degree
Simrad ATS Annotation
This proprietary Simrad telegram contains a text string to be used for annotation
purposes.
Format
$??ATS,tttt<CR><LF>
Format description
1
?? = Talker identifier
2
ATS = telegram identifier
3
tttt = free text string
192
164692/D
Telegram formats
Proprietary third party telegrams and
formats
All third party telegram formats supported by the EK60 are specified here. These
telegram formats are created by third party organizations, and they are supported by the
EK60 to allow for interface to third party systems.
Topics
• Atlas depth telegram on page 193
• Furuno GPhve heave telegram on page 193
Atlas depth telegram
This proprietary Atlas telegram contains the current depth from two channels.
Format
Dyxxxxx.xxm
Format description
1
Dy = Channel number; DA is channel number 1, DB is channel number 2.
2
xxxxx.xx = depth in meters
3
m = meters
Furuno GPhve heave telegram
This proprietary Furuno telegram format contains information about vessel heave.
Format
$PFEC,GPhve,xx.xxx,A*hh<CR><LF>
Format description
1
$PFEC = Talker
2
GPhve = Telegram identifier
3
xx.xxx = heave in meters and decimals
4
A = status
5
hh = checksum
164692/D
193
Simrad EK60
File formats
This chapter describes the file formats supported by the EK60 Scientific echo sounder.
Topics
• Numeric type definition on page 194
• Raw data format on page 194
Numeric type definition
In order to describe the data type formats, common ”C” structures are used to represent
individual data blocks.
Table 7
The size of the various “C” types
char
8-bit integer
WORD
16-bit unsigned integer
short
16-bit integer
Int
32-bit integer
long
32-bit integer
float
32-bit floating point (IEEE 754)
double
64-bit floating point (IEEE 754)
DWORDLONG
64-bit integer
Raw data format
The *.raw file may contain one or more of the following datagram types:
• Configuration
• NMEA
• Annotation
• Sample
194
164692/D
File formats
Every *.raw file begins with a configuration telegram. A second configuration datagram
within the file is illegal. The data content of the Configuration datagram of an already
existing file cannot be altered from the EK60. NMEA, Annotation and Sample datagrams
constitute the remaining file content. These datagrams are written to the *.raw file in the
order that they are generated by the EK60.
In the following descriptions, the information after the "//" characters are comments to
that line.
Note
Strictly sequential time tags are not guaranteed.
Topics
• Data encapsulation on page 195
• Configuration datagram on page 196
• NMEA datagram on page 197
• Annotation datagram on page 198
• Sample datagram on page 198
Data encapsulation
A standard encapsulation scheme is used for all data files. Each datagram is preceded
by a 4 byte length tag stating the datagram length in bytes. An identical length tag
is appended at the end of the datagram.
Format
long Length;
struct DatagramHeader
{
long DatagramType;
struct {
long LowDateTime;
long HighDateTime;
} DateTime;
};
- < datagram content
- long Length;
};
164692/D
195
Simrad EK60
Description
All datagrams use the same header. The datagram type field identifies the type of
datagram. ASCII quadruples are used to ease human interpretation and long term
maintenance; three characters identify the datagram type and one character identifies the
version of the datagram.
The DateTime structure contains a 64-bit integer value stating the number of 100
nanosecond intervals since January 1, 1601. This is the internal ”filetime” used by the
Windows NT operating system. The data part of the datagram contains any number of
bytes, and its content is highly datagram dependent.
Common computers fall into two categories:
• Intel based computers write a multibyte number to file starting with the LSB (Least
Significant Byte).
• HP, Sun and Motorola do the opposite. They write the MSB (Most Significant Byte)
to file first.
The byte order of the length tags and all binary fields within a datagram is always
identical to the native byte order of the computer that writes the data file. It is the
responsibility of the software that reads the file to perform byte swapping of all multibyte
numbers within a datagram if required. Byte swapping is required whenever there is an
apparent mismatch between the head and the tail length tags. Hence, the two length tags
may be used to identify the byte order of the complete datagram.
The Intel processors allow a multibyte number to be located at any RAM address.
However, this may be different on other processors; a short (2 byte) must be located at
an even address, a long (4 byte) and a float (4 byte) must be located at addresses that
can be divided by four. Hence, the numeric fields within a datagram is specified with
this in mind.
Configuration datagram
All character strings are zero terminated.
Format
struct ConfigurationDatagram {
DatagramHeader DgHeader // ”CON0”
ConfigurationHeader ConfigHeader;
ConfigurationTransducer Transducer[];
};
struct ConfigurationHeader
{
char SurveyName[128]; // ”Loch Ness”
char TransectName[128];
char SounderName[128]; // “ER60”
char version [30];
char spare [98];
long TransducerCount; // 1 to 7
};
struct ConfigurationTransducer {
char ChannelId[128]; // Channel identification
long BeamType; // 0 = Single, 1 = Split
196
164692/D
File formats
float Frequency; // [Hz]
float Gain; // [dB] - See note below
float EquivalentBeamAngle; // [dB]
float BeamWidthAlongship; // [degree]
float BeamWidthAthwartship; // [degree]
float AngleSensitivityAlongship;
float AngleSensitivityAthwartship;
float AngleOffsetAlongship; // [degree]
float AngleOffsetAthwartship; // [degree]
float PosX; // future use
float PosY; // future use
float PosZ; // future use
float DirX; // future use
float DirY; // future use
float DirZ; // future use
float PulseLengthTable[5];
// Available pulse lengths for the channel [s]
char Spare1[8]; // future use
float GainTable[5];
// Gain for each pulse length in the PulseLengthTable [dB]
char Spare2[8]; // future use
float SaCorrectionTable[5];
// Sa correction for each pulse length in the PulseLengthTable [dB]
char Spare3[8];
char GPTSoftwareVersion [16];
char Spare4[28];
};
Note
float Gain: The single gain parameter was used actively in raw data files generated
with software version 1.3. This was before PulseLengthTable, GainTable and
SaCorrectionTable were introduced in software version 1.4 to enable gain and Sa
correction parameters for each pulse duration.
NMEA datagram
This datagram contains the original NMEA 0183 input message line; carriage return,
line feed and a terminating zero included.
Format
struct TextDatagram{
DatagramHeader DgHeader; // "NME0"
char Text[]; // "$GPGLL,5713.213,N......"
};
Description and examples
The size of the datagram depends on the message length.
An example GLL NMEA position message line is shown below:
$GPGLL,5713.213,N,1041.458,E‹cr›‹lf›
The information contained in the VTG NMEA telegram is not used by the EK60, and
this information is thus only written to the *.raw data file.
164692/D
197
Simrad EK60
An example NMEA speed message line is shown below:
$HUVTG,245.0,T,245.0,M,4.0,N,2.2,K‹cr›‹lf›
Related topics
• Specification of NMEA telegrams on page 177
Annotation datagram
The annotation datagram contains comment text that you have entered ("dangerous
wreck"). The text string is zero terminated. The size of the complete datagram depends
on the annotation length. The maximum annotation string is 80 characters.
Format
struct TextDatagram {
DatagramHeader DgHeader; // "TAG0"
char Text[]; // "Dangerous wreck"
};
Sample datagram
The sample datagram contains sample data from just one transducer channel. It can
contain power sample data (Mode = 0), or it can contain both power and angle sample
data (Mode = 1).
Format
struct SampleDatagram
{
DatagramHeaderDgHeader; // "RAW0"
short Channel; // Channel number
short Mode; // Datatype
float TransducerDepth; // [m]
float Frequency; // [Hz]
float TransmitPower; // [W]
float PulseLength; // [s]
float BandWidth; // [Hz]
float SampleInterval; // [s]
float SoundVelocity; // [m/s]
float AbsorptionCoefficient; // [dB/m]
float Heave; // [m]
float Tx Roll; // [deg]
float Tx Pitch; // [deg]
float Temperature; // [C]
short Spare 1
Short Spare 2
float Rx Roll [Deg]
float Rx Pitch [Deg]
long Offset; // First sample
long Count; // Number of samples
short Power[]; // Compressed format - See Remark 1!
short Angle[]; // See Remark 2 below!
};
The sample data datagram can contain more than 32 768 sample points.
198
164692/D
File formats
Remarks
1
Power: The power data contained in the sample datagram is compressed. In order
to restore the correct value(s), you must decompress the value according to the
equation below.
y=x
10 log 2
256
where:
• x = power value derived from the datagram
• y = converted value (in dB)
2
Angle: The fore-and-aft (alongship) and athwartship electrical angles are output
as one 16-bit word. The alongship angle is the most significant byte while the
athwartship angle is the least significant byte. Angle data is expressed in 2's
complement format, and the resolution is given in steps of 180/128 electrical
degrees per unit. Positive numbers denotes the fore and starboard directions.
164692/D
199
Simrad EK60
Data subscription and
remote control
The EK60 Scientific echo sounder system provides the facility to subscribe to data, and
to control the system operation from a user developed remote application. This allows
you to write your own application which controls the EK60 operation (e.g. start/stop
pinging, change ping interval, and start/stop data recording).
From your application you can also subscribe to data from the EK60. This means that
you can ask the EK60 to continuously send various data (e.g. Depth data, Target Strength
data, and Integration data) to your application.
Topics
• Data subscription communication on page 200
• Data subscription types on page 211
• Parameter descriptions on page 218
Data subscription communication
The communication between the echo sounder program and your program is performed
by exchanging UDP messages via the LAN. Command and response messages are XML
based text messages. Subscribed data updates are binary data structures, which must
be decoded using information about the data structure.
200
164692/D
Data subscription and remote control
Figure 9
Data subscriptions
Subscriber parameter updates
(UDP / Binary)
Client
application
(Echo sounder
or third party)
Subscribed data updates
(UDP / Binary)
Echo sounder
server application
Commands and responses
(UDP / XML)
(CD010017A)
Data subscriptions overview
The following is an overview of the process for data subscription and remote control.
1
Request server information
2
Connect to server
3
Keep connection alive
4
Issue commands on server
• Subscription of data:
a
Create data subscriptions
b
Handle data
c
Change data subscriptions
d
Destroy data subscriptions
• Parameter management:
5
a
Get parameter
b
Set parameter
c
Start parameter notifications
d
Stop parameter notifications
Disconnecting from server
Request server information
Before you connect to the server running the echo sounder program, your client
application must obtain information about the server’s IP address and command port
number.
164692/D
201
Simrad EK60
RequestServerInfo
Send the following RequestServerInfo message to the specific IP address of the server, or
broadcast the message to receive server information from all servers on the LAN. The
message should be send to the UDP port number found in the Local port field on the
Server page in the Remoting dialog in the server application.
struct RequestServerInfo
{
char Header[4]; // ”RSI\0”
};
ServerInfo2
The server applications will respond to the requesting application with a message
containing information about the server application. The content of the ServerInfo2
message is shown below.
struct ServerInfo2
{
char Header[4]; // ”SI2\0”
char ApplicationType[64];
char ApplicationName[64];
// Name of the current application
char ApplicationDescription[128];
// Description of the current application
long ApplicationID;
// ID of the current application
long CommandPort;
// Port number to send commands to
long Mode;
// If the application is
// running against the local data source
// or a remote data source
char HostName[64];
// IP address of the computer the
// application is running on
};
CommandPort
The server UDP port number CommandPort must be used from now on to send
commands to the server application.
Connecting to server
Before commands can be sent to the server application, the client application must
identify itself to the server application by sending a connect command, ConnectRequest,
to the server. This connect command must contain user account and password
information.
ConnectRequest
The contents of the connect message is shown below.
struct ConnectRequest
{
char Header[4]; // ”CON\0”
char ClientInfo[1024];
// e.g. ”Name:Simrad;Password:\0”
};
202
164692/D
Data subscription and remote control
Response
The server application will respond with a Response message containing at least the
client id if the connect command succeeded, or an error if the connect command
failed. The contents of the various parts of a response message for a successful connect
command is shown below.
struct Response
{
char Header[4]; // ”RES\0”
char Request[4]; // ”CON/0”
char MsgControl[22]; // ”\0”
char MsgResponse[1400];
// Response text containing result of
// connection request
};
MsgResponse
The contents of the MsgResponse field consist of ResultCode and Parameters.
ResultCode: Result of the operation. The following values can be present:
• S_OK: operation was successful
• E_ACCESSDENIED: operation failed due to unknown account or wrong password
• E_FAIL: operation failed due to an unspecified error
Parameters: Comma separated list of various name:value pairs that may be present, only
provided if the ConnectRequest is successful.
• ClientID: identification of the current client, to be used in all further communication
with the server application
• AccessLevel: general access level for the current client
A successful connection will for example provide a MsgResponse containing:
ResultCode:S_OK,
Parameters:{ClientID:1,AccessLevel:1}\0
Connection failure
In case the connect command fails, the ResponseField will contain a ResultInfo field.
ResultInfo: Text describing the failure
Keep connection alive
Once the client application is connected to the server application a two-way monitoring
of the application and communication ”health” must be started. This means that both the
client and the server application must send an ”alive” message, AliveReport, periodically
(each second).
164692/D
203
Simrad EK60
AliveReport
The content of the AliveReport message is shown below.
struct AliveReport
{
char Header[4]; // ”ALI\0”
char Info[1024]; // e.g. ”ClientID:1,SeqNo:1\0”
};
The Info field in an AliveReport message from the client to the server may contain (for
example):
ClientID:1,SeqNo:1\0
SeqNo
The SeqNo part of the Info field shall contain the sequence number of the next request
message from the client to the server (the sequence number shall start on 1). The server
will use this to detect if any messages from the client have been lost, if a loss is detected,
the server will issue a re-transmit request to the client. The AliveReportDef message from
the server to the client may contain (for example):
SeqNo:1\0
Similar, the SeqNo part of the Info field shall contain the sequence number of the next
response message from the server to the client. The client application can use this to
detect if any message from the server is lost, and may then issue a re-transmit request
to the server.
Issue commands on the server
Once connected, the following messages are used to issue commands.
Request
A Request message must be sent to the server application in order to issue a command on
one of the available command targets in the server application. An example of the main
elements of a command request is shown below.
struct Request
{
char Header[4]; // ”REQ\0”
char MsgControl[22];
// Sequence no, Current msg no, Total msg no
char MsgRequest[1400];
// XML based command request
};
MsgControl
The MsgControl field consists of the following parts:
• Sequence number: increments for each request message sent to the server.
• Current message: contains the current message in case a request must be split into
several UDP messages.
• Total message: contains the total number of messages the current request consists of.
204
164692/D
Data subscription and remote control
If the contents of MsgControl is ”2,1,3\0” it means that the current UDP message is the
second request message sent from the client to the server, and that the current message is
message number 1 of a request that consists of a total of three UDP messages.
MsgRequest
The contents of the MsgRequest depend on the current command target and will be
described in detail later. For the moment it is enough to say that the format of the request
is XML based and that the request must specify a command target, a method on the
command target and any input parameters relevant for the current method. The general
structure of a request is shown below.
<request>
<clientInfo>
<cid>clientid</cid>
<rid>requestid</rid>
</clientInfo>
<type>invokeMethod</type>
<targetComponent>xx</targetComponent>
<method>
<yy>
<zz></zz>
</yy>
</method>
</request>
where:
• clientid = client identification
• requestid = request identification
• xx = the name of the current command target
• yy = the name of the current method
• zz = any parameters of the current method
Response
The server application will respond with a Response message as shown below.
struct Response
{
char Header[4]; // ”RES\0”
char Request[4]; // ”REQ/0”
char MsgControl[22];
// Sequence no, Current msg no, Total msg no
char MsgResponse[1400];
// XML based response text containing result
// of command request
};
The contents of the Response depend on the current command target and will be
described in detail later. For the moment it is enough to say that the format of the
response is XML based and that the response contains the result, any error messages,
and any output parameters relevant for the current method. The general structure of a
response is shown below.
164692/D
205
Simrad EK60
<response>
<clientInfo>
<cid dt=”3”>clientid</cid>
<rid dt=”3”>requestid</rid>
</clientInfo>
<fault>
<detail>
<errorcode dt=”3”>0</errorcode>
</detail>
</fault>
<yyResponse>
<zz dt=”3”></zz>
</yyResponse>
</response>
where:
• clientid = client identification
• requestid = request identification
• error code = the result of the operation. 0 = OK
• yy = the name of the current method
• zz = any parameters of the current method
Collecting data
In order to collect echo sounder data from the server application, commands must be
sent to the RemoteDataServer component of the server application. The following
methods/commands are available.
• Create data subscription
• Handling data
• Change data subscription
• Destroy data subscription
For all commands a Request message must be sent from the client to the server - in the
following sections only the contents of the Request field of the Request will be described.
For all commands a Response message will be sent from the server to the client - in
the following sections only the contents of the Response field of the Response will be
described.
Create data subscriptions
The method part of the request shall be set to Subscribe. The Subscribe method is defined
with the following input parameters.
• RequestedPort: The local port on the client application that the data should be sent to
• DataRequest: The actual specification of the subscription
206
164692/D
Data subscription and remote control
An example of the contents of the Request field of a Subscribe command to the
RemoteDataServer is shown below:
<request>
<clientInfo>
<cid>1</cid>
<rid>1</rid>
</clientInfo>
<type>invokeMethod</type>
<targetComponent>RemoteDataServer
</targetComponent>
<method>
<Subscribe>
<requestedPort>12345</requestedPort>
<dataRequest>BottomDetection</dataRequest>
</Subscribe>
</method>
</request>
The server application will respond with a Response message. The Subscribe method has
the following output parameters:
• SubscriptionID: The identification of the current subscription - can be used to
differentiate between multiple subscriptions on the same port
An example of the contents of the Response field of a Subscribe command to the
RemoteDataServer is shown below.
<response>
<clientInfo>
<cid dt=”3”>1</cid>
<rid dt=”3”>1</rid>
</clientInfo>
<fault>
<detail>
<errorcode dt=”3”>0</errorcode>
</detail>
</fault>
<SubscribeResponse>
<subscriptionID dt=”3”></subscriptionID >
</SubscribeResponse>
</response>
Handling data
Data from the RemoteDataServer are wrapped in a ProcessedData structure.
struct ProcessedData
{
char Header[4]; // ”PRD\0”
long SeqNo;
// Sequence number of the current
// UDP message
long SubscriptionID;
// Identification of the current data
unsigned short CurrentMsg;
// Current message number
unsigned short TotalMsg;
// Total number of UDP messages
unsigned short NoOfBytes;
// Number of bytes in the following
// Data field
unsigned short Data[];
// Actual data
};
164692/D
207
Simrad EK60
If the amount of data exceeds the limit of one UDP message, the data will be split into
multiple UDP messages. The TotalMsg field contains the number of UDP messages for
the current data, this is identified with any number larger than 1. The CurrentMsg field
contains the current message number out of the total number of messages.
The Data field shall be decoded according to the specified output structure from the
subscription described in section Data subscription types on page 211.
Change data subscriptions
The method part of the request shall be set to ChangeSubscription. The
ChangeSubscription method has the following parameters.
• subscriptionID: The id of the subscription that should be changed
• dataRequest: The actual specification of the subscription. This is described in the
section Data subscription types on page 211.
An example of the contents of the Request field of a ChangeSubscription command
to the RemoteDataServer is shown below.
<request>
<clientInfo>
<cid>1</cid>
<rid>1</rid>
</clientInfo>
<type>invokeMethod</type>
<targetComponent>RemoteDataServer
</targetComponent>
<method>
<ChangeSubscription>
<subscriptionID>1</subscriptionID>
<dataRequest>BottomDetection</dataRequest>
</ChangeSubscription>
</method>
</request>
The server application will respond with a Response message. The ChangeSubscription
method does not have any output parameters.
An example of the contents of the Response field of a ChangeSubscription command
to the RemoteDataServer is shown below.
<response>
<clientInfo>
<cid dt=”3”>1</cid>
<rid dt=”3”>1</rid>
</clientInfo>
<fault>
<detail>
<errorcode dt=”3”>0</errorcode>
</detail>
</fault>
<ChangeSubscriptionResponse>
</ChangeSusbcriptionResponse>
</response>
Destroy data subscriptions
The method part of the request shall be set to Unsubscribe. The Unsubscribe method has
the following parameters.
• subscriptionID: The identification of the subscription that shall be closed
208
164692/D
Data subscription and remote control
An example of the contents of the szRequest field of an Unsubscribe command to the
RemoteDataServer is shown below.
<request>
<clientInfo>
<cid>1</cid>
<rid>1</rid>
</clientInfo>
<type>invokeMethod</type>
<targetComponent>RemoteDataServer
</targetComponent>
<method>
<Unsubscribe>
<subscriptionID>1</subscriptionID>
</Unsubscribe>
</method>
</request>
The server application will respond with a ResponseDef message. The Unsubscribe
method does not have any output parameters.
An example of the contents of the Response field of an Unsubscribe command to the
RemoteDataServer is shown below.
<response>
<clientInfo>
<cid dt=”3”>1</cid>
<rid dt=”3”>1</rid>
</clientInfo>
<fault>
<detail>
<errorcode dt=”3”>0</errorcode>
</detail>
</fault>
<UnsubscribeResponse>
</UnsubscribeResponse>
</response>
Parameter management
In order to set/get parameters in the server application, commands must be sent to the
ParameterServer component of the server application. The following methods/commands
are available:
• Get parameter value/attribute
• Set parameter value/attribute
• Subscribe on parameter value/attribute change notifications
• Unsubscribe parameter notifications
Get parameter value/attribute
The method part of the request shall be set to GetParameter. The server application will
respond with a Response message.
Input parameters
The GetParameter method has the following input parameters:
• ParamName: Full name of the current parameter
• Time: The time where the value should be read (only available for some parameters).
Use 0 if latest value is wanted.
164692/D
209
Simrad EK60
An example of the contents of the Request field of a GetParameter command to the
ParameterServer is shown below.
<request>
<clientInfo>
<cid>1</cid>
<rid>28</rid>
</clientInfo>
<type>invokeMethod</type>
<targetComponent>
ParameterServer
</targetComponent>
<method>
<GetParameter>
<paramName>
RemoteCommandDispatcher/ClientTimeoutLimit
</paramName>
<time>0</time>
</GetParameter>
</method>
</request>
Output parameters
The GetParameter method has the following output parameters:
• Value: The value of the parameter
• Time: The time when the parameter was updated
An example of the contents of the Response field of a GetParameter command to the
ParameterServer is shown below.
<response>
<clientInfo>
<cid dt=”3”>1</cid>
<rid dt=”3”>28</rid>
</clientInfo>
<fault>
<detail>
<errorcode dt=”3”>0</errorcode>
</detail>
</fault>
<GetParameterResponse>
<paramValue>
<value>60</value>
<time>0</time>
<paramValue/>
<GetParameterResponse/>
</response>
Set parameter value/attribute
The method part of the request shall be set to SetParameter. The server application will
respond with a Response message.
Input parameters
The SetParameter method has the following input parameters:
• ParamName: Full name of the current parameter
• paramValue: The new value to update the parameter with
• paramType: The data type of the paramValue field
210
164692/D
Data subscription and remote control
An example of the contents of the Request field of a SetParameter command to the
ParameterServer is shown below.
<request>
<clientInfo>
<cid>1</cid>
<rid>28</rid>
</clientInfo>
<type>invokeMethod</type>
<targetComponent>
ParameterServer
</targetComponent>
<method>
<SetParameter>
<paramName>
RemoteCommandDispatcher/ClientTimeoutLimit
</paramName>
<paramValue>60</paramValue>
<paramType>3</paramType>
</SetParameter>
</method>
</request>
Output parameters
The SetParameter method does not have any output parameters.
An example of the contents of the Response field of a SetParameter command to the
ParameterServer is shown below.
<response>
<clientInfo>
<cid dt=”3”>1</cid>
<rid dt=”3”>28</rid>
</clientInfo>
<fault>
<detail>
<errorcode dt=”3”>0</errorcode>
</detail>
</fault>
</response>
Disconnecting from server
The client application shall send a DisconnectRequestDef message to the server
application when the client is finished with its operation against the server.
The parameters are:
• Header: DIS\0
• szClientInfo: Name:Simrad;Password:\0
Data subscription types
This section describes the available data subscriptions in the echo sounder.
All data subscriptions require the ChannelID (channel identifier) for the frequency
channel from which the subscription data is requested. A comma separated list of
available identifiers can be obtained using the ParameterServer component to get the
parameter TransceiverMgr Channels.
164692/D
211
Simrad EK60
The data output will always start with a 64-bit integer time value, which identifies
the number of 100 nanoseconds intervals that has elapsed since January 1, 1601. If a
parameter is skipped in the subscription input string it will be replaced by the default
value. The decoding of the subscription will be case insensitive. In the output data to be
received by external devices, the information about the current structure length is given.
From this information, the number of elements in an array may be calculated.
Bottom detection
Subscription type string: BottomDetection.
Input
Parameters
Range
Default
Unit
UpperDetectorLimit
(0,20000)
0
m
LowerDetectorLimit
(0,20000)
1000
m
BottomBackstep
(-200,100)
–50
dB
Output
struct StructBottomDepthHeader
{
DWORDLONG dlTime;
};
struct StructBottomDepthData
{
double dBottomDepth;
// detected bottom depth [meter]
double dReflectivity;
// bottom surface backscatter [dB]
double dVesselLogDistance;
// sailed distance [nmi]
};
struct StructBottomDepth
{
StructBottomDepthHeader BottomDepthHeader;
StructBottomDepthData BottomDepthData;
};
Example
Building a BottomDetection subscription string:
BottomDetection, ChannelID=<ChannelID>,
UpperDetectorLimit=3.0, LowerDetectorLimit=500.0,
BottomBackstep=-60.0
Target strength (TS) detection
Subscription type string: TSDetection.
Input
Parameters
Range
Default
Unit
sLayerType
(Surface. Bottom, Pelagic)
Surface
None
Range
(0,20000)
10000
m
212
164692/D
Data subscription and remote control
Parameters
Range
Default
Unit
RangeStart
(0,20000)
0
m
MinTSValue
(–120,50)
–50.0
dB
MinEchoLength
(0,20)
0.8
None
MaxEchoLength
(0,20)
1.8
None
MaxGainCompensation
(0,12)
6.0
None
MaxPhaseDeviation
(0,100)
8.0
Phase
steps
Output
struct StructTSDataHeader
{
DWORDLONG dlTime;
};
struct StructEchoTrace
{
double Depth;
// Target depth [meter]
double TSComp;
// Compendated TS [dB]
double TSUncomp;
// Uncompensated TS [dB]
double AlongshipAngle;
// Alongship angle [deg]
double AthwartshipAngle;
// Athwartship angle [deg]
double sa;
// Sa value for target
};
struct StructTSDataBody
{
WORD NoOfEchoTraces;
// Number of targets accepted in ping
StructEchoTrace EchoTraceElement[100];
};
struct StructTSData
{
StructTSDataHeader TSDataHeader;
StructTSDataBody TSDataBody;
};
Example
Building a TSDetection subscription string:
TSDetection, ChannelID=<ChannelID>,
LayerType=Surface, Range=200,
RangeStart=3, MinTSValue=-55,
MinEcholength=0.7, MaxEcholength=2.0,
MaxGainCompensation=6.0, MaxPhasedeviation=7.0
Sample data
Subscription type string: SampleData.
164692/D
213
Simrad EK60
Input
Parameters
Range
Default
Unit
SampleDataType
(Power, Angle, Sv, Sp, Ss, TVG20, TBG40,
PowerAngle)
Power
None
Range
(0,20000)
100
m
RangeStart
(0,20000)
0
m
Output for Power, Angle, Sv, Sp, Ss, TVG20 and TVG40
struct StructSampleDataHeader
{
DWORDLONG dlTime;
};
struct StructSampleDataArray
{
short nSampleDataElement[30000];
// 16-bits sample in logarithmic format
};
struct StructSampleData
{
StructSampleDataHeader SampleDataHeader;
StructSampleDataArray SampleDataArray;
};
Output for PowerAngle
struct StructSampleDataHeader
{
DWORDLONG dlTime;
};
struct StructSamplePowerAngleArray
{
short nSampleDataElement[60000];
// Composite sample array for power
// and angle
};
struct StructSamplePowerAngleValues
{
int nPowerValues;
// Number of power samples
int nAngleValues;
// Number of angle values
};
struct StructSamplePowerAngle
{
StructSampleDataHeader SampleDataHeader;
StructSamplePowerAngleValues SamplePowerAngleValues;
StructSamplePowerAngleArray SamplePowerAngleArray;
};
Example
Building an SampleData subscription string:
SampleData,ChannelID=<ChannelID>,
SampleDataType=Power, Range=100,
RangeStart=10
Echogram
Subscription type string: Echogram.
214
164692/D
Data subscription and remote control
Input
Parameters
Range
Default
Unit
PixelCount
(0,10000)
500
None
Range
(0,20000)
100
m
RangeStart
(0,20000)
0
m
TVGType
(Pr, Sv, Sp, TS, SpAndTS)
Sv
None
EchogramType
(Surface, Bottom, Trawl)
Surface
None
CompressionType
(Mean, Peak)
Mean
None
ExpansionType
(Interpolation, Copy)
Interpolation
None
Output
struct StructEchogramHeader
{
DWORDLONG dlTime;
};
struct StructEchogramArray
{
short nEchogramElement[30000];
// 16-bit logarithmic format
};
struct StructEchogram
{
StructEchogramHeader EchogramHeader;
StructEchogramArray EchogramArray;
};
Example
Building a Echogram subscription string:
Echogram, ChannelID=<ChannelID>,
PixelCount=500, Range=100, RangeStart=0,
TVGType=TS, EchogramType=Surface,
CompressionType=Mean, ExpansionType=Interpolation
Targets echogram
Subscription type string: TargetsEchogram .
This subscription will only produce an echogram array containing detected echo traces
with their compensated TS values between the transmit pulse and the bottom. Below
bottom the selected TVG type is used.
Input
Parameters
Range
Default
Unit
PixelCount
(0,10000)
500
None
Range
(0,20000)
100
m
RangeStart
(0,20000)
0
m
TVGType
(TS, SP, Ts)
Must be set
None
EchogramType
(Surface, Bottom)
Surface
None
164692/D
215
Simrad EK60
Parameters
Range
Default
Unit
MinTSValue
(-120,50)
–50
dB
MinEchoLength
(0,20)
0.8
None
MaxEchoLength
(0,20)
1.8
None
MaxGainCompensation
(0,12)
6.0
dB
MaxPhaseDeviation
(0,100)
8.0
Phase
steps
Output
struct StructEchogramHeader
{
DWORDLONG dlTime;
};
struct StructEchogramArray
{
short nEchogramElement[30000];
};
struct StructEchogram
{
StructEchogramHeader EchogramHeader;
StructEchogramArray EchogramArray;
};
Example
Building a TargetsEchogram subscription string:
TargetsEchogram, ChannelID=<ChannelID>,
PixelCount=500, Range=100, RangeStart=0,
TVGType=TS, EchogramType=Surface, MinTSValue=-55.0,
MinEcholength=0.7, MaxEcholength=2.0,
MaxGainCompensation=6.0, MaxPhasedeviation=7.0
Integration
Subscription type string: Integration.
The update of Sa will be enabled by setting the Integration State to start. If the update
parameter is set to Update Ping, the new Sa value is received for every ping. If the Update
Accumulate is set, the Sa is received only when the Integration State changes to Stop.
Input
Parameters
Range
Default
Unit
LayerType
(Surface, Bottom, Pelagic)
Surface
None
IntegrationState
(Start, Stop)
Start
None
Update
(UpdatePing, UpdateAccumulate)
UpdatePing
None
Range
(0,20000)
100
m
RangeStart
(0,20000)
10
m
Margin
(0,200)
1
m
SvThreshold
(–200,100)
–100
dB
216
164692/D
Data subscription and remote control
Output
struct StructIntegrationDataHeader
{
DWORDLONG dlTime;
};
struct StructIntegrationDataBody
{
double dSa;
// integrated value [m2/nmi2]
};
struct StructIntegrationData
{
StructIntegrationDataHeader IntegrationDataHeader;
StructIntegrationDataBody IntegrationDataBody;
};
Example
Building a Integration subscription string:
Integration, ChannelID=<ChannelID>,
State=Start, Update=UpdatePing,
Layertype=Surface, Range=100,
Rangestart=10, Margin=0.5, SvThreshold=-100.0
Targets integration
Subscription type string: TargetsIntegration.
This is a composite subscription where TS detection and integration parameters must be
set. The Sa value is taken only from the accepted single echo trace inside the range.
Input
Parameters
Range
Default
Unit
sLayerType
(Surface, Bottom, Pelagic)
Surface
None
sIntegrationState
(Start, Stop)
Start
None
Update
(UpdatePing, UpdateAccumulate)
UpdatePing
None
Range
(0,20000)
100
m
RangeStart
(0,20000)
10
m
Margin
(0,200)
1
m
SvThreshold
(–200,100)
–100
dB
MinTSValue
(–120,50)
–50
dB
MinEchoLength
(0,20)
0.8
None
MaxEchoLength
(0,20)
1.8
None
MaxGainCompensation
(0,12)
6.0
dB
MaxPhaseDeviation
(0,100)
8.0
Phase
steps
Output
struct StructIntegrationDataHeader
{
164692/D
217
Simrad EK60
DWORDLONG dlTime;
};
struct StructIntegrationDataBody
{
double dSa;
// integrated value from single echo
// trace [m2/nmi2]
};
struct StructIntegrationData
{
StructIntegrationDataHeader IntegrationDataHeader;
StructIntegrationDataBody IntegrationDataBody;
};
Example
Building a TargetsIntegration subscription string:
TargetsIntegration, ChannelID=<ChannelID>,
State=Start, Layertype=Surface, Range=100,
Rangestart=10, Margin=0.5, SvThreshold=-100.0,
MinTSValue=-55.0, MinEcholength=0.7,
MaxEcholength=2.0, MaxGainCompensation=6.0,
MaxPhasedeviation=7.0
Parameter descriptions
The ParameterServer component can be used to access asynchronous and ping based
parameters. The parameters can be “read”, “set” or subscribed to. A subscription will
notify only when the parameter’s value is changed.
The following is a list of the most relevant parameters. The parameter name must be
used when working with parameters as described in section Parameter management
on page 209.
Parameters identified as “read only” (R/O) can not be set. Some of them, for example
sensor parameters, can be set, but the new value will immediately be over-written if a
live sensor is connected.
Table 8
Ping based parameters
Description
Parameter name
R/O
Range
Unit
List of ChannelID’s
TransceiverMgr/
Channels
Yes
N/A
-
Frequency
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
Frequency
Yes
1.000 to 1.000.000
Hz
Pulse length
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
PulseLength
No
0,000 to 0,065535
sec
Sample interval
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
SampleInterval
No
0,000010 to
0,065535
sec
Transmit power
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
TransmitPower
No
0 to 10.000
W
218
164692/D
Data subscription and remote control
Table 8
Ping based parameters (cont'd.)
Description
Parameter name
R/O
Range
Unit
Absorption Coefficient
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
AbsorptionCofficient
Yes
0,0 to 0,3
dB/m
Sound velocity
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
SoundVelocity
No
1.400 to 1.700
m/s
Transducer name
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
TransducerName
Yes
N/A
-
Transducer depth
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
TransducerDepth
No
0 to 10.000
m
Equivalent beam angle
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
EquivalentBeamAngle
No
–100 to 0
dB
Angle sensitivity alongship
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
AngleSensitivityAlongship
No
0 to 100
el.deg/mec.deg
Angle sensitivity
athwartship
No
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
AngleSensitivityAthwartship
0 to 100
el.deg/mec.deg
Beamwidth alongship
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
BeamWidthAlongship
No
0 to 100
deg
Beamwidth athwartship
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
BeamWidthAthwartship
No
0 to 100
deg
Angle offset alongship
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
AngleOffsetAlongship
No
–10 to 10
deg
Angle offset athwartship
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
AngleOffsetAthwartship
No
–10 to 10
deg
Gain
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
Gain
No
1 to 100
dB
Sa correction
TransceiverMgr/
<ChannelID>/
SaCorrection
No
–10 to 10
dB
Ping time
TransceiverMgr/
PingTime
Yes
2E64
100 ns step
Vessel latitude
TransceiverMgr/
Latitude
No
–90 to 90
deg
Vessel longitude
TransceiverMgr/
Longitude
No
–180 to 180
deg
Vessel heave
TransceiverMgr/
Heave
No
–100 to 100
m
164692/D
219
Simrad EK60
Table 8
Ping based parameters (cont'd.)
Description
Parameter name
R/O
Range
Unit
Vessel roll
TransceiverMgr/
Roll
No
–90 to 90
deg
Vessel pitch
TransceiverMgr/
Pitch
No
–90 to 90
deg
Vessel distance
TransceiverMgr/
Distance
Yes
0 to 100.000
nmi
Noise estimate
Yes
ProcessingMgr/
<ChannelID>/
ChannelProcessingCommon/
NoiseEstimate
0 to –200
dB
Table 9
Asynchronous parameters
Description
Parameter name
R/O
Range
Unit
Vessel speed
OwnShip/
Speed
No
0 to 100
m/s
Vessel latitude
OwnShip/
Latitude
No
–90 to 90
deg
Vessel longitude
OwnShip/
Longitude
No
–180 to 180
deg
Vessel heave
OwnShip/
Heave
No
–100 to 100
m
Vessel roll
OwnShip/
Roll
No
–90 to 90
deg
Vessel pitch
OwnShip/
Pitch
No
–90 to 90
deg
Vessel distance
OwnShip/
VesselDistance
No
0 to 100.000
nmi
Environment temperature
OwnShip/
EnvironmentData/
Temperature
No
–5 to 50
deg
Environment salinity
OwnShip/
EnvironmentData/
Salinity
No
0 to 0,01
–
Environment sound velocity
OwnShip/
EnvironmentData/
SoundVelocity
No
1400 to 1700
m/s
Unit
Table 10
Operation mode parameters
Description
Parameter name
R/O
Range
Ping start/stop
OperationControl/
OperationMode
No
Last bit: 0 = Stop, 1 = Start
Ping rate mode
AcousticDeviceSynchroniser/ No
SyncMode
1 = Interval, 2 = Maximum,
32 = Single step
220
164692/D
Data subscription and remote control
Table 10
Operation mode parameters (cont'd.)
Description
Parameter name
Ping interval
Save raw data on/off
164692/D
Range
Unit
AcousticDeviceSynchroniser/ No
Interval
Larger than 10
msec
AcousticDeviceSynchroniser/ No
SaveRawData
0 = Off, 1 = On
R/O
221
Simrad EK60
Echo sounder theory
When you use an echo sounder there are some basic knowledge that you may find it
useful to possess.
Topics
• Concepts on page 223
– Observation range on page 223
– Split-beam operation on page 224
– Bottom echo on page 225
– Wave propagation on page 225
– Biomass on page 226
– Dynamic range and display presentation on page 227
– Bottom slopes on page 227
• Parameters on page 230
– TVG gain on page 230
– Output power on page 231
– Pulse duration on page 233
– Range selection on page 235
222
164692/D
Echo sounder theory
Concepts
Observe the following descriptions of key concepts.
Topics
• Observation range on page 223
• Split-beam operation on page 224
• Bottom echo on page 225
• Wave propagation on page 225
• Biomass on page 226
• Dynamic range and display presentation on page 227
• Bottom slopes on page 227
Observation range
Absorption increases dramatically with frequency in salt water. For maximum
observation range you should select a low operating frequency, a large transducer and the
maximum transmit power.
Typical observation ranges are shown in the table. Using the Simrad ES38B transducer
(38 kHz, 7x7 degrees, 2000 W) you can observe a 60 centimeter cod down to 950 meters,
and bottom detection works down to 2800 meters. However, with the Simrad ES200–7C
transducer (200 kHz, 7x7 degrees, 1000 W) you can only observe that same cod down to
270 meters, and bottom detection becomes unreliable below 500 meters.
Table 11
Maximum detection depth, single beam transducers
Transducer
Frequency
(kHz)
Pulse
duration
(ms)
Bandwidth
(hz)
Tx power
(W)
Range fish
(m)
Range
bottom (m)
12–16
12
16,4
193
2000
850
10000
27–26
27
8,18
387
3000
1100
4400
38/200D
38
4,09
766
1000
500
2100
38–9
38
4,09
766
1500
800
2600
38–7
38
4,09
766
2000
950
2800
50/200D
50
2,05
1493
1000
500
1500
50–7
50
2,05
1493
2000
700
1900
120–25
120
1,02
3026
1000
390
800
50/200D
200
1,02
3088
1000
280
550
164692/D
223
Simrad EK60
Table 12
Maximum detection depth, split beam transducers
Transducer
Frequency
(kHz)
Pulse
duration
(ms)
Bandwidth
(hz)
Tx power
(W)
Range fish
(m)
Range
bottom (m)
ES18–11
18
8,21
382
2000
1100
7000
ES38B
38
4,09
766
2000
950
2800
ES70–11
70
2,05
1526
800
450
1100
ES120–7C
120
1,02
3026
1000
440
850
ES200–7C
200
1,02
3088
1000
270
550
These range calculations assume a normal sea water salinity (3.5 ppt) and temperature
(+10°C), an average bottom (surface backscattering strength = -20 dB) and a noise
level typical for a moving vessel.
Split-beam operation
The EK60 uses the split-beam technique for assessment of the size distribution of
individual fish. A split-beam transducer is electrically divided into four quadrants. All
four quadrants are excited in parallel during transmission. However, the received signal
from each quadrant is separately amplified in a four-channel matched receiver allowing
the direction of arrival of an echo to be determined.
An acoustic wave front propagating towards the
transducer arrives at the four quadrants at different
times causing the phase angle of the electrical output
signal from the quadrants to differ. The fore-and-aft
angle is determined from the electrical phase
difference between the fore and the aft transducer
halves, and the athwartships angle is determined
from the starboard and port signals.
Figure 10 Split beam
principles
Fish A is positioned along the transducer axis where
the transducer has its maximum sensitivity, while
Fish B is positioned towards the edge of the beam
where the sensitivity is lower. Evidently, the echo
signal from Fish A will be stronger than the signal
from Fish B even though they are of the same size
and at the same depth. Hence, determining fish size from the received echo strength
alone will not be too successful. A split-beam echo sounder measures the position of the
fish within the beam. The sounder corrects for the difference in transducer sensitivity
and computes the true size of the fish.
A
B
(CD010217K)
The split-beam measurement technique only works for echoes originating from one
single fish since the electrical phase will be random if echoes from multiple individuals
at different positions in the beam are received simultaneously.
Consequently, measurement of fish size inside a school of fish tends to be unreliable.
224
164692/D
Echo sounder theory
Bottom echo
A hard flat bottom reflects the transmitted signal as if it were a mirror. The transmitted
pulse hits the illuminated bottom area at nearly the same instant, and the echo from
different parts of this area arrive back at the surface also at nearly the same instant.
The received echo signal is basically an attenuated
copy of the short transmit pulse. The echo signal
from a sloped bottom is characterized by having a
longer duration and a slower rise and fall time. The
transmitted pulse first hits the slope at point (A),
and as time elapses the reflection point travels along
the slope towards point (B). Many locations do not
have a solid hard bottom. Frequently, the bottom
is composed of layers of mud, clay and sand which
can be observed as coloured bands on the echo
sounder display.
Figure 11 Bottom echo
principles
A
The bottom detection algorithm is implemented
solely in software, and separate algorithms are
run for each frequency channel. The algorithm is
designed with emphasis on reliability in the sense that erroneous depth detections are
never output. Whenever the quality of a detection is questionable the algorithm outputs a
depth of 0.00 to indicate that no reliable detection was obtained. The EK60 algorithm
is designed to handle a number of difficult situations. The algorithm maintains bottom
lock for a discontinuous jump in bottom depth. It avoids false bottom detections on a
dense school of fish. The algorithm chooses the upper boundary of the first layer when
the bottom consists of layers.
B
(CD010217I)
The bottom detection algorithm locks to the first good bottom return. The depth at point
A rather than the depth along the transducer axis will be output for a sloped bottom. The
detected depth value is always smaller than the depth along the transducer axis implying
that a safety margin is automatically included.
Wave propagation
The velocity of sound wave propagation in the sea varies slightly with temperature,
salinity and pressure. The velocity varies between 1440 and 1520 m/s in shallow sea
water, while a velocity around 1480 m/s can be expected at 1000 m depth. In shallow
fresh water the velocity is approximately 1430 m/s.
A good average value to be used in the Environment dialog is 1470 m/s.
164692/D
225
Simrad EK60
The EK60 transmits high energy sound wave pulses
into the sea. A flat bottom reflects the transmitted
wave as if it were a mirror. The propagating energy
is spread over a larger and larger area as it travels
down to the bottom and up again. The energy is
spread over a four times larger area every time the
travel distance doubles.
Figure 12 Wave propagation
from a flat bottom
A large school of fish reflects sound waves similarly.
This type of spreading is referred to as square-law
or 20 log TVG (Time Varying Gain) spreading.
The situation is slightly different when observing
the echoes from individual fish. The transmitted
wave undergoes square-law spreading when
travelling from the surface and down to the fish. The swim bladder of the fish scatters a
small fraction of the arriving energy in all directions. Travelling from the fish and back
towards the surface the scattered wave undergoes another square-law spreading. The
combined effect is referred to as quad-law or 40 log TVG spreading.
(CD010217C)
(CD010217G)
In the echo sounder’s Echogram dialog 20 log TVG
spreading is referred to as School Gain and Bottom
Gain, while 40 log TVG spreading is referred to
as Fish Gain.
Propagation losses due to absorption are much
higher in sea water than in fresh water. Absorption
also increases with frequency. At 38 kHz the
absorption is 0.5 dB/km in fresh water and 10 dB/km
in sea water. At 200 kHz the absorption is 10 dB/km
in fresh water and 50 dB/km in salt water. The echo
sounder must know which water type is present in
order to compensate for these losses correctly.
Figure 13 Wave propagation
from a fish
(CD010217H)
The dB (decibel) unit has long traditions in underwater acoustics and other fields in
physics. It is a logarithmic measure for the ratio between two quantities.
Biomass
Provided that you use an EK60 with a split beam transducer, the numerical view will
contain a value for biomass.
This biomass value is an indicator to how much fish you currently have in the current
echogram. Every single fish will emit an echo, and the sum of all these registered echoes
are presented as a number. Smaller organisms such as plankton will also emit echoes, but
these are so weak that they will hardly influence on the total biomass.
The EK60 records all the targets from the smallest plankton to the largest whale, and
provides these findings as a number. For all practical purposes this number will provide
you with information about the fish abundance to allow you to decide if it pays off
226
164692/D
Echo sounder theory
to start fishing. You must also consider if this number is a result of large amounts of
plankton or bait, or if there is real fish below the keel. The number provided to display
fish abundance is relative, and after some use your experience will be a valuable factor
when the decision is made.
The biomass value is also used by the researches to calculate how much fish there is in
the ocean. If you know the fish specie and the size of the fish, you can calculate number
of individual fishes for a given volume of sea. Other means to establish the final result
are trawling and catch data from the fishery community.
Note
If you have other echo sounders or sonars running asynchronous with the EK60, the
EK60 will also measure the transmit pulse from the secondary system. This is called
interference.
A full synchronization of the various acoustic instruments is required. If your own vessel
produces excessive noise this will also be taken into the biomass calculations and
provide you with inaccurate information.
Related topics
• Echogram on page 144
Dynamic range and display presentation
The EK60 echo sounder has a dynamic range of 140 dB. This means that the sounder
can receive both very strong and very weak echoes. Actually, the EK60 will detect
echoes from plankton to whales, bottom on most depths, and present the information free
from distortion. As a comparison, our old echo sounders ES380 and ET100 had - using
analogue TVG - a dynamic range corresponding to approximately 65 dB.
Naturally, we can not present all these echoes on the display simultaneously, as this
would create a mess of colours.
When 12 colours are used, we create a 36 dB section and give each colour a 3 dB
strength. Every colour (3 dB) the represent a doubling of the echo strength. With 12
colours in use this will be a 36 dB colour range from grey to brown. Grey is used for the
weakest echoes, while the strongest echoes are brown. All echoes stronger than brown
will still be brown, while echoes weaker than grey will not be shown.
With 64 colours in use, each colour represents approximately 0,5 dB echo strength.
The old paper sounders had a dynamic range of 12 dB in their printouts using the
“colours” from light grey to black. The dynamic range in the EK60 colour presentation
is thus a lot larger; 24 dB or 250 times.
Bottom slopes
“Bottom slopes” is a well known phenomenon with echo sounders. This happens when
the bottom rises suddenly, and the start edge of the transducer beam detects the bottom
before the opposite edge.
164692/D
227
Simrad EK60
One method for minimizing the “bottom slopes” phenomenon is to use a transducer with
narrow beam, or to increase the pulse duration.
To minimize this phenomenon on the EK60 you can open the Bottom Detector dialog by
right-clicking the depth presentation, and then change the setting for Backstep Minimum
Level.
A
The peak of the bottom pulse
B
Default bottom backstep level
C
Approximate bottom backstep level for flatfish
detection
D
Approximate bottom backstep level for seagrass
detection
Figure 14 The Bottom
Backstep principle
(CD010217-003)
-30 dB
-50 dB
The bottom pulse basically identifies the bottom depth
-70 dB
just prior to the peak of the pulse (A). However, this
may not be the true bottom. For example, if the bottom
pulse is generated by a rock bottom under a thick layer
of mud, the actual depth is slightly shallower. For this
reason, the EK60 is by default set up to give you a depth reading a few milliseconds
before the peak of the pulse. This is done by setting the bottom backstep level to a
default value of -50 dB (B).
By further decreasing the level (make it more negative) the bottom detector will become
more “sensitive”, and the bottom will be detected earlier.
On the echogram the white line will then “climb” up the slope. Make sure that you do
not increase the sensitivity too much. This will have an effect on the fish detection
on a flat bottom, and the biomass values will be wrong. Our experience show that an
approximately -75 dB bottom backstep value can be used safely.
By increasing the bottom backstep value (make it more positive) the bottom will be
detected later, and it will appear to be deeper.
Tip
Rule of thumb:
• Reduce the bottom backstep level (make it more negative) to detect the bottom earlier,
and thus increase bottom detection “sensitivity”.
• Increase the bottom backstep level (make it more positive) to detect the bottom later,
and thus increase “penetration”.
228
164692/D
Echo sounder theory
Example 6
Bottom slopes
Figure 15
Bottom slopes
The edge of the beam (A) hits the
bottom first, and starts to give an
echo. The bottom detector in the
EK60 measures the strongest echo,
detects what it thinks is the bottom,
and starts the white line.
The area above the bottom detection
(B) will be masked off, and even
though it may contain fish these will
not be visible because the echo from
the bottom is stronger than those
from the fish. The estimated depth
(C) will be shown.
On the EK60 the phenomenon
will cause the bottom line (E) to be
distorted.
164692/D
(CD010217-002)
229
Simrad EK60
Parameters
Observe the following descriptions of key parameters.
Topics
• TVG gain on page 230
• Output power on page 231
• Pulse duration on page 233
• Range selection on page 235
TVG gain
TVG means Time Varied Gain. When TVG is used in an echo sounder, we also some
times refer to it as depth variable gain.
The purpose of the TVG functionality is to make all fishes appear with the same echo
colour independent of their different depths.
In more technical terms, time varied gain (TVG) is a signal compensation. When the
acoustic signal is transmitted from the echo sounder transducer, it is subjected to loss due
to absorption and spreading. First, depending on the current salinity and temperature,
the water will absorb some of the energy from the transmission. The absorption loss
increases as the range increases. Second, the energy will spread out to form a circular
beam. The width of this beam also increases with the range. Both absorption and
spreading will thus reduce the energy, and both will also have an effect on the returned
echo signal. The TVG compensation is designed to counteract these natural phenomena,
and this is done in the EK60 using digital signal processing. The desired result is that
fish of the same size return echoes of the same strength (colour), regardless of range.
Because the strength of the echoes will become weaker with increasing depth, the echo
sounder will automatically amplify the deepest echoes more than the shallower echoes.
In fact, the gain will increase proportional to how long the echo sounder “waits” for the
echoes. When you choose the TVG setting you can either switch it off (which we do
NOT recommended), or you can choose settings 20 log R or 40 log R.
The various settings control the gain algorithms, how much gain to be applied when
the depth increases. When you choose the 40 log R setting, the gain will increase with
the depth more rapidly than if you choose the 20 log R setting. This is simply because
individual fishes emit smaller echoes than a school, and this makes them more difficult to
detect. In the equation the character R means “Range”.
230
164692/D
Echo sounder theory
The illustration shows how
the gain close to the bottom
(B) is larger than just below
the transducer (A). The echoes
from the fish close to the
bottom will then be shown with
the same strength (colour) as
echoes from pelagic fish.
Figure 16
TVG principle
20 log R
A
40 log R
A
The left vessel uses the 20 log
R setting. Due to the increasing
beam width (C), single fishes
are shown larger and larger
with increasing depth, even
though they may be of identical
size.
The right vessel uses the 40
log R setting. The size of the
fish will still appear to grow larger as the range increases, but the echo is compensated
differently to offer a more uniform echo strength (colour in the echogram).
(CD010217-004)
When you are looking for schools these will fill the entire beam, just as the bottom
normally does. A lot of gain is then not necessary. The 20 log R setting will provide an
acceptable echo strength.
Related topics
• Echogram on page 144
Output power
The echo sounder's transducer converts the electrical input power to a sound transmitted
into the water. In the majority of the transducers manufactured by Simrad the transducer's
power efficiency is between 50 and 75%. This means that between 50 and 75% of the
input power is transmitted as sound. Transducers from other manufacturers may have as
low as 5% power efficiency. Naturally, it is very important that you check this parameter
when you wish to purchase a transducer.
The echo sounder's output power is a measurement on how much electrical energy
the amplifier can send down to the transducer. The maximum power is limited by
the transducer you have, and how much power it may accept from the transmitter for
conversion to acoustic energy. If you send too much power into the transducer, you may
inflict permanent and unrepairable damage.
The source level (SL) is a measurement on how much acoustic energy that is in fact sent
out by the transducer, how high “volume” it will emit. The source level is measured as
“sound pressure” one meter below the transducer face, and it is given i dB re. 1µPa at
1 m.
164692/D
231
Simrad EK60
In order to know how much power you can use you must know what kind of transducer
you are using. Provided that the echo sounder has been installed with a Simrad
transducer, and you know what type it is, this is no problem. All necessary parameters
about the transducer are then known by the echo sounder, and the software in the sounder
will ensure that you do not output too much power. If you use a third party transducer
you must manually check that the output power from the Simrad EK60 does not exceed
the power rating.
Note
If you send too much power into the transducer it will – just like a loudspeaker – be
damaged beyond repair.
If the transducer receives too much power from the echo sounder, it will also cavitate.
This is a physical phenomenon causing the appearance of gas bubbles immediately
below the transducer face. When this happens hardly any energy is sent into the water,
and the transducer face is subject to physical damage. The cavitation depends on the
power applied, the physical size of the transducer face, how deep the transducer is
mounted, and the amount of contamination (air and particles) under the transducer face.
Transducers with a large face can accept more power.
Near sea level, minute bubbles of micron or submicron size are always present in
the ocean. When the rarefaction tension phase of an acoustic wave is great enough,
the medium ruptures or "cavitates". For sound sources near the sea surface, the
ever-present cavitation nuclei permit rupture to occur at pressure swings of the
order of 1 atm (0.1 MPa), depending on the frequency, duration, and repetition
rate of the sound pulse. Cavitation bubbles may also be produced by Bernoulli
pressure drops associated with the tips of high-speed underwater propellers. Natural
cavitation is created by photosynthesis.
Several extraordinary physical phenomena are associated with acoustic cavitation.
Chemical reactions can be initiated or increased in activity; living cells and
macromolecules can be ruptured; violently oscillating bubbles close to a solid
surface can erode the toughest of metals or plastics; light may be produced
by cavitation (sonoluminescence). The high pressures and high temperatures
(calculated to be 30,000° Kelvin) at the inteior during the collapsing phase of
cavitating single bubbles can cause emission of a reproducible pulse of light of
duration less than 50 picoseconds.
Of direct importance to the use of sound sources at sea is the fact that, as the sound
pressure amplitude increases, ambient bubbles begin to oscillate nonlinearly, and
harmonics are generated. At sea level, the amplitude of the second harmonic is
less than 1 percent of the fundamental as long as the pressure amplitude of the
fundamental of a CW wave is less than about 0.01 atm rms (l kPa) (Rusby 1970).
This increases to about 5 percent harmonic distortion when the signal is about 10
kPa.
232
164692/D
Echo sounder theory
When the peak pressure amplitude is somewhat greater than 1 atm, the absolute
pressure for a sound source at sea level will be less than zero during the rarefaction
part of the cycle. In using CW below 10 kHz, this negative pressure, or tension, is
the trigger for a sharply increased level of harmonic distortion and the issuance of
broadband noise. Any attempt to increase the sound pressure amplitude appreciably
beyond the ambient pressure will cause not only total distortion but also the
generation of a large cloud of bubbles which will actually decrease the far-field
acoustic pressure.
The detailed bubble activities during cavitation have been studied in several
laboratories. Acousticians have identified gaseous cavitation resulting in streamers
of hissing bubbles that jet away from regions of high acoustic pressure swings, and
vaporous cavitation, which radiates shock waves of broadband noise.
— Herman Medwin & Clarence S.Clay (1998)[2]
Related topics
• Changing the pulse duration to enhance the vertical resolution on page 22
• Normal Operation on page 76
Pulse duration
The echo sounder's pulse duration is a measurement for how long the acoustic pulse lasts.
The pulse duration can be adjusted according to the current depth and what kind of fish
you are looking for. The deeper you wish to see, the longer pulse duration should be
used. Remember that in EK60 echo sounder, the pulse duration and the bandwidth
is mutually dependant.
• Long pulse - lots of acoustic energy - narrow bandwidth - less sensitive for noise
from own vessel and environment
• Short pulse - less acoustic energy - wide bandwidth - more sensitive for noise from
own vessel and environment
2.
from “Fundamentals of Acoustical Oceanography”, Academic Press, San Diego, 1998
164692/D
233
Simrad EK60
A pulse duration of 1 mS covers
1,5 meters in the water, and
this corresponds to a target
separation of approximately
75 cm. This is a typical pulse
duration that you may well use
down to 250 to 300 meters.
If you work in deeper waters
use a longer pulse duration,
if it is shallower, use a shorter
pulse duration. Try out different
values, and seek out the pulse
duration that provides you with
the clearest echo presentation
with minimum noise, but with
maximum fish detection and
separation.
Figure 17
Pulse duration principles
1
1
2
2
C
A
A
B
B
D
(CD010217C)
The left vessel uses a long pulse duration (C). As you can see, this causes the echoes
from the two fishes (A) and (B) to merge. The right vessel uses a shorter pulse duration,
and the two fishes will then appear as two separate echoes on the echogram. Thus,
short pulses will provide the best resolution and separation of individual fishes, but the
echo sounder is more sensitive to noise.
The speed of sound in water is approximately 1500 m/s. The length of a 1 mS sound
pulse will thus be approximately 1,5 meter. With the echo sounder you can then adjust
the sound pulse from 7,5 cm (0.05 mS) to 24 m (16 mS) depending of the operational
frequency. This is an important factor for the appearance of single fishes.
• When the vertical distance between to fishes, or the distance between a fish and the
bottom, is more than the distance covered by a half pulse duration, the echoes will be
presented as two separate echoes. The fish above the bottom will be identified.
• If the distance between two individual fishes, or the distance between a single fish
and the bottom, is less than the distance covered by a half pulse duration, the echo
will be presented as one echo. The echo from the fish close to the bottom will be
merged with the bottom echo.
All operational frequencies have different pulse durations. The difference between for
example a 50 kHz and a 38 kHz transducer is however not large:
• A 50 kHz transducer can be used with pulse durations from 0,12 mS to 2 mS
• A 38 kHz transducer can be used with pulse durations from 0,26 mS to 4 mS.
Basically, both these frequencies will provide you with the same detection ability. A
50 kHz transducer may provide better resolution in shallow waters, while the 38 kHz
transducer may provide longer range on deeper waters. On the 38 kHz transducer the
shortest pulse duration is 0,26 mS. This results in a 40 cm sound pulse and a 20 cm
fish separation.
234
164692/D
Echo sounder theory
Related topics
• Changing the pulse duration to enhance the vertical resolution on page 22
• Normal Operation on page 76
Range selection
For every frequency (channel) you wish to present on the echo sounder display, you are
provided with two echograms.
A
Upper echogram (surface
related)
B
Lower echogram (bottom
related)
C
Scope view for upper echogram
D
Scope view for lower echogram
Figure 18
Range selection
(CD010217E)
A
Normally, the upper echogram will
show the entire depth range from
the sea surface and down to the
bottom, while the lower echogram
shows a bottom expansion. This is
a magnification of the area just above
and below the bottom.
You are free to choose any
presentation you want in any of the
echograms.
C
B
D
Upper echogram: Pelagic or
surface related
Example 7
Start Range in a surface related echogram
In a surface echogram, set the Start Range value to 0 meters. This will make the
echogram start from the sea surface (provided that the transducer offset has been
defined). Set Range to the current depth plus 20 meters. The echogram will now
show the area from the sea surface and down to 20 meters “below” the bottom.
The bottom contour is easily detected when the depth changes.
Example 8
Start Range in a surface echogram
In a surface echogram, set the Start Range value to 10 meters. This will make the
echogram start from 10 meters below the sea surface (provided that the transducer
offset has been defined). Set Range to the current depth plus 20 meters. The
echogram will now show the area from 10 meters below the sea surface, and down
to 10 meters “below” the bottom. The bottom contour is easily detected when
the depth changes.
164692/D
235
Simrad EK60
Example 9
Start Range in a pelagic echogram
In a pelagic echogram, set the Start Range value to 20 meters. This will make the
echogram start from 20 meters below the sea surface (provided that the transducer
offset has been defined). Set Range to 40 meters. The echogram will now show
the area from 20 meters below the sea surface, and down to 60 meters below the
transducer. Provided that the depth is larger than 60 meters, the bottom contour
is not shown.
Lower echogram: Bottom related (bottom expansion)
The majority of our users prefer to use the lower echogram (B) for bottom expansion.
To set this up, right-click in the lower echogram to open the Echogram dialog, and
click Bottom.
When you use bottom expansion, the water surface is not the reference any longer, but
the bottom is. It is always 0. That means that the bottom in this echogram will always be
flat, even though it may vary in the upper echogram. To choose a vertical depth range
for the bottom expansion, right-click in the range scale (C) on the right hand side of
the echogram to open the Bottom Range dialog. Then, select Range and Stop Relative
Bottom. The choice for Range defines an area from a few meters below the bottom to a
few meters above it. The Stop Relative Bottom setting decides how far below or above
the area shall stop. In this echogram positive depth is below the bottom, while negative
depth is above. These two settings are mutually dependant, so you may turn the bottom
line “up side down”. Typical settings may be:
• Range = 15 m
• Stop Relative Bottom = 5 m
This provides you with a 15 meters high phased area starting at 5 meters below the
bottom to 10 meters above it.
To change the depth range, use the wheel on the mouse.
Example 10
Start Range and Range in bottom related echogram
In a bottom echogram, set the Start Range value to –5 meters. This will make the
echogram start from 5 meters above the bottom. Set Range to the 5 meters plus
10 = 15 meters. The echogram will now show the area from 5 meters above the
depth, and down to 10 meters “below” the bottom. The bottom contour will appear
as a flat line.
236
164692/D
Installation
Installation
These are the specific procedures required to get you started with the Simrad EK60.
Normally, you will only need to do these procedures once.
We recommend that you allow your dealer – with the assistance from a shipyard – to do
the physical installation, install the software, and get you started.
Topics
• Installation of the system units on page 237
• Upgrading the EK60 software on page 238
• Installation of the EK60 software on page 238
• Setting up the EK60 transceiver(s) for the first time on page 239
Installation of the system units
This procedure explains the basic principles of EK60 installation. It does not provide
any details related to physical installation of the various units, location and installation of
the transducer(s), and the various interface parameters.
All documentation for the Simrad EK60 is located on the media device provided with the
delivery. The documents can also be downloaded from http://www.simrad.com.
Note
In order to install the Simrad EK60 you must obtain and read the Simrad EK60
Installation manual.
Procedure
1 Install the various hardware units (transceiver(s), computer(s) and transducer(s) as
described in the Simrad EK60 Installation manual.
2 Connect all necessary cables between the hardware units.
a Connect the transducer(s) to the transceiver(s).
b Connect power to the transceiver(s).
c Connect the Ethernet cable between the transceiver and the computer. Use an
Ethernet switch if you have more than one transceiver.
d Connect the necessary cables to the display; power and video.
164692/D
237
Simrad EK60
3
4
These tasks are described in detail in the Simrad EK60 Installation manual.
Do a close visual inspection of the installation. Check each cable and connection to
ensure that all wiring is correct.
Power up the EK60, and proceed with the next procedure; software installation.
Related topics
• Installation of the EK60 software on page 238
Upgrading the EK60 software
Use this procedure when you wish to upgrade the EK60 software on a computer.
Procedure
1 Using a file manager application on your computer, make a backup copy of the
trlist.ini file.
2 Write down all the applicable interface settings that you have on the old software
installation.
This includes parameters related to inputs and outputs to and from external devices
such as GPS, speed log etc on serial and Ethernet communication lines.
3 Write down all the transceiver installation parameters.
This includes IP addresses to all the transceivers, as well as a list of the transducers
you have installed.
4 Write down all relevant parameters related to synchronization with peripheral
systems.
5 Write down all relevant parameters related to external annotations.
6 Observe the software installation procedure to proceed.
Related topics
• Installation of the EK60 software on page 238
Installation of the EK60 software
Use this procedure when you wish to install the EK60 software on a computer.
Procedure
1 Power up the computer.
2 Insert the EK60 software media.
If the EK60 software is provided on a CD or DVD, and your computer is not fitted
with a suitable drive, copy the files from the CD/DVD to a USB memory stick.
3 Use a file manager application on the computer to access the software.
4 Double-click on the Setup.exe file to start the installation.
5 Allow the installation program to run. Follow the instructions provided.
238
164692/D
Installation
6
Once the installation has been completed, double-click the program icon on the
desktop to start the application.
7
If you use Windows 7 operating system:
a
Observe that Windows 7 Firewall will open a dialog requesting information
about the network.
Select Public, and click Allow access.
b
8
The operating system may also open other dialogs to verify that the EK60
software can run on the computer. You must permit this.
Observe the relevant start-up procedure.
Related topics
• Setting up the EK60 transceiver(s) for the first time on page 239
• Powering up the EK60 on page 19
Setting up the EK60 transceiver(s) for the
first time
These procedures explain how to set up you computer to communicate with the
transceiver. You only need to do this once.
Topics
• Main procedure on page 239
• Installing frequency channels on page 241
• Starting normal operation on page 241
Main procedure
This procedure explains how to set up you computer to communicate with the transceiver.
You only need to do this once.
Note that this procedure covers both the Windows® XP® and Windows® 7 operating
systems.
Important
Your computer may be provided with two Ethernet boards to interface with a local area
network (LAN). You must then use one Ethernet board to communicate with the EK60
transceiver(s), and one to communicate with the LAN. These two boards can and must
be set up separately. The Ethernet board used to communicate with the transceivers(s)
must be set up with manual IP addresses. The board used to communicate with the LAN
must be set up to obtain an IP address automatically (unless otherwise decided by your
network administrator.)
164692/D
239
Simrad EK60
Procedure
1
On the computer, define the network adapter settings.
Windows® XP®
a
Click Start →Settings →Network Connections.
b
Click on the network adapter once to select it.
c
Right-click, and click Properties on the short-cut menu.
d
On the list of connections, click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then Properties.
e
Click Use the following IP address, and enter the IP address and network mask.
IP Address: 157.237.15.12
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
f
Click OK to save the settings.
g
Exit all dialogs.
Windows® 7
a
Click Start →Control Panel →Network Connections.
b
Click Change adapter settings on the left menu.
c
Click once on the network adapter to select it, and click Properties on the
short-cut menu.
d
On the list of connections, click Internet Protocol 4 (TCP/IPv4), and then
Properties.
e
Click Use the following IP address, and enter the IP address and network mask.
IP Address: 157.237.15.12
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
f
Click OK to save the settings.
g
Exit all dialogs.
2
On the computer, start the EK60 program.
3
Set up the transceiver(s) and transducer(s).
Refer to section Installing frequency channels
→ Installing frequency channels on page 241
4
Start normal operation.
Refer to section Installing frequency channels
→ Starting normal operation on page 241
Related topics
• Installing frequency channels on page 241
• Starting normal operation on page 241
240
164692/D
Installation
Installing frequency channels
This procedure explains how to install a frequency channel.
Each transceiver contains one or more frequency channels.
This phrase is used to identify the combination of a transceiver, transducers and the
frequencies offered. Split beam transceivers contain only one channel each.
The upper part of the Transceiver Installation dialog displays a list of frequency channels
which either are, or have been, installed on the EK60. For each channel on the list,
a colour coded text is provided.
The following status values are available in the Transceiver Installation dialog.
• Entries shown in black are detected frequency channels which are not installed, but
available for installation.
• Entries shown in green are detected frequency channels, which are both detected
and installed.
• Entries shown in blue are detected frequency channels which are installed by another
echo sounder program, and thus not available for this application.
• Entries shown in red are frequency channels which have previously been installed,
but are no longer available.
Procedure
1
Click Install →Transceiver.
2
Observe that the Transceiver Installation dialog opens
The purpose of the Transceiver Installation dialog is to set up the necessary
parameters to connect the EK60 computer to the transceiver(s) and the transducer(s).
→ Transceiver Installation on page 96
3
In the Transceiver Installation dialog, click Browse.
The EK60 will automatically search the network for transceivers.
4
Observe that all the frequency channels are listed in the dialog.
5
Select a frequency channel that is available, and choose the correct transducer in
the spin box.
Note
This is a critical task. You must ensure that the correct transducer is selected. If
you connect the transceiver to a transducer that can not handle the power rating, it
may be damaged beyond repair.
6
Click OK to save the current settings and close the dialog.
7
Restart the echo sounder.
Starting normal operation
This procedure explains how to set up the EK60 for normal operation and start ‘pinging’.
164692/D
241
Simrad EK60
Important
The procedure assumes that you have already installed one or more frequency channels.
Procedure
1
Click File →Operation.
2
Observe that the Normal Operation dialog opens
The purpose of the Normal Operation dialog is to offer you an overview of the
current transceiver parameters, and to provide you with the ability to change them.
3
Verify that all the parameters have been defined.
4
Click OK to save the current settings and close the dialog.
5
Click the Start Pinging button [►] on the toolbar.
242
164692/D
Index
Index
12
colours, 90
64
colours, 90
A
About
bottom slopes, 227
depth variable gain, 230
dialog description, 136
display presentation, 227
dynamic range, 227
NMEA telegram
formats, 174
output power, 231
pelagic echogram, 235
pulse duration, 233
TVG, 230
users, 117
Access level
data source, 83
users, 117
Acknowledge
Messages, 165–166
Active
transceiver mode, 76
Add
echogram playback files, 79
port, 130
serial port, 120, 122
user, 117
Add User Account
dialog description, 160
Administrator
user, 117
Always on top
Port Monitor, 171
Analog Motion Sensor
Setup
dialog description, 172
Annotation
dialog description, 112
latest, 113
Annotations
enable, 147
telegram, 192
Apply to all
Colour Scale, 143
Atlas
depth telegram, 193
enable depth telegram, 130
NMEA depth sentence, 130
ATS
telegram, 192
Attitude
164692/D
heading, 186–187
heave, 186–187
pitch, 186–187
roll, 186–187
Audience
this manual, 9
Auto
enable automatic
telegram selection,
102–103, 106
log in, 84
NMEA Sentence,
102–103, 106
Auto update
Port Monitor, 171
Automatic Start
file output, 125
Echogram short-cut
menu, 70
Help menu, 67, 136
Install menu, 65, 95
Numerical short-cut
menu, 73
Operation menu, 63, 75
Options menu, 64, 89
Output menu, 66, 123
Scope short-cut menu, 71
Shortcut menus, 68, 138
Single Target Histogram
short-cut menu, 69
Single Target Position
short-cut menu, 69
View menu, 64, 86
Window menu, 67, 132
B
C
Bandwidth
operational status, 77
Basic
use, 222
Baudrate, 170
NMEA 0183 standard, 175
serial port, 120
Biomass
description, 226
telegram, 190
Bottom
reference, 145
Bottom Backstep
adjustment, 141
description, 228
Bottom Detection
dialog description, 140
Bottom expansion
description, 236
Bottom hardness
telegram, 190
Bottom line
echogram, 146
Bottom Range
datagrams, 164
dialog description, 149
Bottom slopes
description, 227
Broadcast, 100, 116, 128, 168
Browse
file output, 124
for transceivers, 100
Buttons
Colour Scale short-cut
menu, 72
Depth short-cut menu, 68
Calculation Interval
dialog description, 91
ping, 92
time, 92
Calibration
Single Target Detection, 142
Cascade
function description, 133
Change
IP address, 26
password, 118
Change user
data source, 83
Channel, 76, 130
disconnect, 26
Channel window
Colour scale, 60
depth, 55
Echogram, 58
Numerical, 61
Scope, 59
Single target histogram, 57
Single target position, 56
Channel windows
overview, 54
Channels
how to
set up, 34
Check
low ping rate, 23
Choices
Colour Scale short-cut
menu, 72
Depth short-cut menu, 68
Echogram short-cut
menu, 70
243
Simrad EK60
Help menu, 67, 136
Install menu, 65, 95
Numerical short-cut
menu, 73
Operation menu, 63, 75
Options menu, 64, 89
Output menu, 66, 123
Scope short-cut menu, 71
Shortcut menus, 68, 138
Single Target Histogram
short-cut menu, 69
Single Target Position
short-cut menu, 69
View menu, 64, 86
Window menu, 67, 132
Click
definition, 19
Close All
function description, 135
Colour coding
serial ports, 119
Colour palette, 90
Colour scale, 90
view, 60–61
Colour Scale
dialog description, 143
Colour Scale short-cut
menu
options, 72
Colour Setup
dialog description, 89, 158
Colour step
Colour Scale, 143
COM port, 169
Commands
Colour Scale short-cut
menu, 72
Depth short-cut menu, 68
Echogram short-cut
menu, 70
Help menu, 67, 136
Install menu, 65, 95
Numerical short-cut
menu, 73
Operation menu, 63, 75
Options menu, 64, 89
Output menu, 66, 123
Scope short-cut menu, 71
Shortcut menus, 68, 138
Single Target Histogram
short-cut menu, 69
Single Target Position
short-cut menu, 69
View menu, 64, 86
Window menu, 67, 132
Communication
NMEA 0183
parameters, 175
244
Communication mode,
100, 116, 128, 168
Communication port,
102–103, 105–106,
108–109, 129
Communication port setup,
102–103, 105–106, 108,
110, 129
Compression
Echogram, 148
Computer Ethernet board
IP Address, 100, 240
Subnet mask, 100, 240
Configure Statusbar
dialog description, 161
Contents
function description, 136
Context sensitive on-line
help, 9
Course data, ground
referenced
telegram, 183
Course data, water
referenced
telegram, 183
Current File Size
file output, 125
Current Message
Messages, 165–166
Current output directory
file output, 124
Current port
Port Monitor, 171
D
Data bits, 170
NMEA 0183 standard, 175
Data encapsulation, 195
description, 196
format, 195
Data recording
how to, 28
Data replay
how to, 29
Data source
parameters, 83
Data Source
dialog description, 82
Data subscriptions, 200
Datagram outputs
EK500, 163
Datagrams
about, 175
Day white
colour palette, 90
DBS
enable telegram format, 129
NMEA Sentence, 129
telegram, 177, 188
DBT
enable telegram format, 130
NMEA Sentence, 130
telegram, 178
Delete
echogram playback files, 79
Messages, 165–166
port, 130
setting file, 94
Delete all
Messages, 165–166
Delete Layer
dialog description, 155
Depth
below surface
(telegram), 177
offset from transducer
(telegram), 178
references, 145
telegram, 177–178
telegram (Atlas), 193
transducer, 78
view, 55
Depth below transducer
telegram, 178
Depth Output
dialog description, 128
Depth short-cut menu
options, 68
Depth telegram
below transducer, 178
Depth variable gain
description, 230
Description
about, 136
Add User Account
dialog, 160
Analog Motion Sensor
Setup, 172
Annotation dialog, 112
biomass, 226
Bottom Detection
dialog, 140
bottom expansion, 236
Bottom Range dialog, 149
bottom slopes, 227
Calculation Interval
dialog, 91
Cascade function, 133
Close All function, 135
Colour Scale dialog, 143
Colour Setup dialog, 89, 158
Configure Statusbar
dialog, 161
Contents function, 136
data source, 83
164692/D
Index
Data Source dialog, 82
Delete Layer function, 155
Depth Output, 128
display presentation, 227
display views, 50
dynamic range, 227
Echogram dialog, 144
EK500 Datagram dialog, 162
Environment dialog, 110
Ethernet Output dialog, 127
Exit dialog, 85
File Output dialog, 123
fish abundance, 226
HAC Datagram dialog, 166
Hide View dialog, 158
Histogram dialog, 144
Horizontal Axis dialog, 148
LAN Port Setup dialog, 168
Layer Properties dialog, 154
Load Settings dialog, 93
Local Time dialog, 92
Log In dialog, 84
Log Out dialog, 85
menu system, 62
Motion, 107
Navigation dialog, 101
New Channel function, 132
New Layer dialog, 152
Normal Operation
dialog, 76
Numerical View dialog, 156
Open All function, 134
output power, 231
Ping Control dialog, 80
Port Management
dialog, 118
Port Monitor dialog, 170
Print dialog, 156
Print Preview dialog, 157
pulse duration, 233
Range selection, 235
Remoting, 113
Replay dialog, 78
Save Settings dialog, 94
Serial Port Setup dialog, 169
Single Target Detection
dialog, 141
Status Bar, 53, 87
Surface Range dialog, 151
system, 13
Tile function, 134
Toolbars, 86
Tooltip dialog, 91
Transceiver Installation
dialog, 96
Transducer Parameters
dialog, 172
Trawl dialog, 109
164692/D
TVG, 230
User Properties dialog, 160
Users and Passwords
dialog, 117
Diagram
system, 14
Dialog description
about, 136
Add User Account, 160
Analog Motion Sensor
Setup, 172
Annotation, 112
Bottom Detection, 140
Bottom Range, 149
Calculation Interval, 91
Colour Scale, 143
Colour Setup, 89, 158
Configure Statusbar, 161
Data Source, 82
Depth Output, 128
Echogram, 144
EK500 Datagram, 162
Environment, 110
Ethernet Output, 127
File Output, 123
HAC Datagram, 166
Histogram, 144
Horizontal Axis, 148
LAN Port Setup, 168
Layer Properties, 154
Load Settings, 93
Log In, 84
Log Out, 85
Motion, 107
Navigation, 101
New Layer, 152
Normal Operation, 76
Numerical View, 156
Ping Control, 80
Port Management, 118
Port Monitor, 170
Print, 156
Print Preview, 157
Remoting, 113
Replay, 78
Save Settings, 94
Serial Port Setup, 169
Single Target Detection, 141
Surface Range, 151
Tooltip, 91
Transceiver Installation, 96
Transducer Parameters, 172
Trawl, 109
User Properties, 160
Users and Passwords, 117
Disconnect
frequency channel, 26
Display
colour scale, 90
colours, 90
number of colours, 90
organisation, 51
Display presentation
description, 227
Display Views
descriptions, 50
Distance
Calculation Interval, 92
horizontal axis, 149
manual setting, 105
to trawl, 110
Distance information
datagram, 105
hardware pulse, 105
none, 105
source, 104
Speed, 105
Distance marker
echogram, 147
Distance travelled
telegram, 183
Double-click
definition, 19
DPT
enable telegram format, 130
NMEA Sentence, 130
telegram, 178
Drawing
system, 14
Dusk
colour palette, 90
Dynamic range
description, 227
E
Easy operation
toolbar, 52, 87
Echo length
Single Target Detection, 142
Echo spacing
Single Target Detection, 142
Echo trace setup
EK500 datagram output, 163
Echogram
add playback files, 79
annotations enable, 147
bottom, 235
bottom line, 146
compression, 148
dialog description, 144
distance marker, 147
expansion, 148
horizontal speed, 149
interpolation, 148
label, 149
245
Simrad EK60
pelagic, 235
ping marker, 147
playback files, 79
presentations, 21
range
how to change, 21
remove playback files, 79
setting
how to change, 21
time marker, 147
trawl (line), 146
vertical markers, 147
vertical scale, 147
view, 58
white Line, 146
Echogram channel
how to disconnect, 26
how to install, 25, 241
Echogram colours, 90
Echogram short-cut menu
options, 70
EK500
enable depth telegram, 130
NMEA Sentence, 130
EK500 Datagram
dialog description, 162
EK500 datagrams
list, 163
EK500 Depth
telegram, 185
EK60
familiarization, 11
introduction, 11
Software version, 9
EK60 installation
basic, 237
EM Attitude
telegram, 186–187
Environment
dialog description, 110
Ethernet
Local IP Address, 100,
114, 116, 128, 168
Local port, 115
Remote IP Address, 116,
128, 169
Remote port, 116, 128, 169
Ethernet address
transceiver, 98
Ethernet board, computer
IP Address, 100, 240
Subnet mask, 100, 240
Ethernet Output
dialog description, 127
Event annotation, 113
Event number, 113
Event text, 113
Event timer, 113
246
Exit
function description, 85
Expansion
Echogram, 148
F
Familiarization
Simrad EK60, 11
File
delete setting file, 94
File formats, 194
File name
setting file, 93–94
File Name Prefix, 125
File output
Browse, 124
Current output directory, 124
File Output
dialog description, 123
File path
setting file, 93
File Size
file output, 125
Files
add for echogram
playback, 79
echogram playback, 79
remove from echogram
playback, 79
Fish abundance
description, 226
Format specifications
raw data, 194
Frequency
transducer, 99
Frequency channel
installation, 25, 241
Function description
Cascade, 133
Close All, 135
Contents, 136
Delete Layer, 155
Exit, 85
Hide View, 158
Local Time, 92
New Channel, 132
Open All, 134
Status Bar, 87
Tile, 134
Toolbars, 86
Functions
Operation menu, 63, 75
Functions and dialogs
descriptions, 74
Furuno
heave telegram, 193
G
Gain compensation
Single Target Detection, 142
Gain TVG
description, 230
Geographical position
telegram, 179
GGA
enable telegram format, 102
NMEA Sentence, 102
telegram, 179
GLL
enable telegram format, 102
NMEA Sentence, 102
telegram, 179
Global positioning
telegram, 179
GPT
General Purpose
Transceiver, 98
transceiver, 98
H
HAC Datagram
dialog description, 166
file output, 126
Max(imum) file size, 126
Handling rules
transducer, 13, 38
HDG
enable telegram format, 106
NMEA Sentence, 106
telegram, 180
HDM
enable telegram format, 106
NMEA Sentence, 106
telegram, 181
HDT
enable telegram format, 106
NMEA Sentence, 106
telegram, 181
Heading
attitude telegram, 186–187
telegram, 181
Heading deviation and
variation
telegram, 180
Heading magnetic
telegram, 181
Heading, true
telegram, 181
Heat, excessive
do NOT expose
transducer, 13, 38
Heave
attitude telegram, 186–187
offset, 173
164692/D
Index
sensitivity, 173
Heave roll and pict
protocol, 190
Help
on-line, 9
Help menu
options, 67, 136
Hex display
Port Monitor, 171
HFB
telegram, 188
Hide View
function description, 158
Histogram
dialog description, 144
Horizontal Axis, 149
dialog description, 148
How to
basic system installation, 237
change
echogram range, 21
echogram settings, 21
vertical resolution, 22
change the IP address, 26
choose Normal
operational mode,
241
connect multiplexer, 34
define
maximum depth, 22
minimum depth, 22
disconnect channel, 26
initial start-up, 239
install channel, 25, 241
install EK60 software, 238
install frequency
channel, 25, 241
introduction to
procedures, 18
investigate low ping rate, 23
measure noise, 30
power off EK60, 20
power on EK60, 19
record raw data, 28
replay raw data, 29
transceiver setup, 34
upgrade EK60 software, 238
I
Important
if something breaks
down, 12
information, 12
transducer handling, 13, 38
when docking, 12
when the EK60 is not
used, 12
164692/D
Information
NMEA 0183, 175
Initial
start -up procedure, 239
Install menu
options, 65, 95
Installation
basic, 237
procedures, 237
software, 238
Interface port, 102–103,
105–106, 108–109, 129
Interface port setup,
102–103, 105–106, 108,
110, 129
Interval
ping, 81
Introduction
Simrad EK60, 11
Investigate
low ping rate, 23
IP address
change, 26
data source, 83
remote, 121
IP Address
Ethernet board in
computer, 100, 240
K
Kildenivå
description, 231
L
Label
echogram, 149
LAN
Local IP Address, 100,
114, 116, 128, 168
Local port, 115
Remote IP Address, 116,
128, 169
Remote port, 116, 128, 169
LAN port
communication
parameters setup, 122
list, 121
Name, 121
parameters setup, 122
Protocol, 122
Remote IP, 121
Remote port, 121
Remove, 122
Setup, 122
LAN Port Setup
dialog description, 168
Last Annotation, 113
Latest Annotation, 113
Layer Properties
dialog description, 154
Lifting
transducer, 13, 38
List
LAN ports, 121
of users, 117
serial ports, 119
Load Settings
dialog description, 93
Local Area Network
Local IP Address, 100,
114, 116, 128, 168
Local port, 115
Remote IP Address, 116,
128, 169
Remote port, 116, 128, 169
Local IP Address, 100,
114, 116, 128, 168
Local port, 115
Local Time
function description, 92
Log in
data source, 83
Log In
dialog description, 84
Log out
data source, 83
Log Out
dialog description, 85
Loop
echogram playback, 79
Low ping rate
investigate, 23
M
Main menu, 52
Manual speed, 104
Manual text, 112
Markers
echogram, 147
Max. level
Colour Scale, 143
Max. Percentage
Histogram, 144
Max(imum) File Size
file output, 125
HAC file output, 126
Max(imum) Vessel
Distance
file output, 125
Maximum
depth
how to define, 22
ping rate, 80
Maximum Depth
247
Simrad EK60
bottom detection, 140
Maximum echo length
Single Target Detection, 142
Maximum gain
compensation
Single Target Detection, 142
Maximum phase deviation
Single Target Detection, 142
Menu system, 62
Messages
Acknowledge, 165–166
Current Message, 165–166
Delete, 165–166
Delete all, 165–166
Min. level
Colour Scale, 143
Minimum
depth
how to define, 22
Minimum Depth
bottom detection, 140
Minimum echo length
Single Target Detection, 142
Minimum echo spacing
Single Target Detection, 142
Minimum threshold (dB)
Single Target Detection, 142
Minutes
Calculation Interval, 92
Mode, 76
choose Normal, 241
Ethernet
communication, 100,
116, 128, 168
Modify
user properties, 118
Motion
dialog description, 107
Motion Sensor Setup
dialog description, 172
Multiplexer
connection
procedure, 34
N
Name
data source, 83
LAN port, 121
serial port, 120
setting file, 93–94
National Marine
Electronics Association, 175
Navigation
dialog description, 101
Network
Local IP Address, 100,
114, 116, 128, 168
248
Local port, 115
Remote IP Address, 116,
128, 169
Remote port, 116, 128, 169
New Channel
function description, 132
New Layer
dialog description, 152
Night
colour palette, 90
Night unfiltered
colour palette, 90
NMEA
about formats, 174
NMEA 0183
communication
parameters, 175
information, 175
NMEA Annotation, 112
NMEA sentence, 102–103,
105–106
NMEA Sentence
auto, 102–103, 106
NMEA telegram
DBT, 178
GGA, 179
GLL, 179
HDG, 180
HDM, 181
HDT, 181
RMC, 181
VBW, 182
VHW, 183
VLW, 183
VTG, 183
NMEA Telegram
formats, 174
NMEA telegrams
specifications, 177
No. of Bottom Values
EK500 datagram output, 164
Olex output, 164
No. of Surface Values
EK500 datagram output, 164
Olex output, 164
Noise measurements
procedure, 30
Normal operation
toolbar, 52, 87
Normal Operation
dialog description, 76
Normal operational mode
choose, 241
Number of colours, 90
Numbered event, 113
Numerical
view, 61
Numerical short-cut menu
options, 73
Numerical View
dialog description, 156
O
Observer
user, 117
Off
procedure, 20
Off/on
procedures, 19
Offset
heave, 173
pitch, 173
roll, 173
Olex
bottom values
parameter, 164
output datagrams
required, 163
surface values
parameter, 164
On
procedure, 19
On-line help, 9
On/off
procedures, 19
Open All
function description, 134
Operation menu
options, 63, 75
Operational mode
choose Normal, 241
Operational procedures
introduction, 18
Operator
user, 117
Options
Colour Scale short-cut
menu, 72
Depth short-cut menu, 68
Echogram short-cut
menu, 70
Help menu, 67, 136
Install menu, 65, 95
Numerical short-cut
menu, 73
Operation menu, 63, 75
Options menu, 64, 89
Output menu, 66, 123
Scope short-cut menu, 71
Shortcut menus, 68, 138
Single Target Histogram
short-cut menu, 69
Single Target Position
short-cut menu, 69
View menu, 64, 86
164692/D
Index
Window menu, 67, 132
Options menu
options, 64, 89
Output EK500, 127
Output menu
options, 66, 123
Output power
description, 231
P
Palette, 90
Parity, 170
Parity bit
NMEA 0183 standard, 175
Passive
transceiver mode, 76
Password
change, 118
log in, 84
Path
setting file, 93
Phase deviation
Single Target Detection, 142
Phased area
description, 235
PI sensor definition
telegram, 188
Ping
Calculation Interval, 92
horizontal axis, 149
interval, 81
maximum speed, 80
single step, 81
Ping Control
dialog description, 80
Ping marker
echogram, 147
Ping rate
investigate, 23
Pinging
start/stop, 80
Pitch
attitude telegram, 186–187
offset, 173
sensitivity, 173
Pixel
adjustment
Echogram, 148
Playback
add echogram files, 79
echogram files, 79
loop echogram files, 79
raw data
how to, 29
remove echogram files, 79
Point-to-Point, 100, 116,
128, 168
164692/D
Port, 102–103, 105–106,
108–109, 129
Port Management
dialog description, 118
Port Monitor
Always on top, 171
Auto update, 171
Current port, 171
dialog description, 170
Hex display, 171
open dialog, 121–122
Rx data, 171
Tx data, 171
Port setup, 102–103,
105–106, 108, 110, 129
Position geographical
telegram, 179
Position GNNS
telegram, 181
Position system fixed data
telegram, 179
Power efficiency
description, 231
Power off
procedure, 20
Power on
procedure, 19
Power on/off
procedures, 19
Power output, 78
description, 231
Presentation
colour scale, 90
colours, 90
echogram procedures, 21
number of colours, 90
Press
definition, 19
Principle
output power, 231
pulse duration, 233
TVG, 230
Print
dialog description, 156
Print Preview
dialog description, 157
Procedure
basic system installation, 237
change the IP address, 26
channel disconnect, 26
channel installation, 25, 241
choose Normal
operational mode,
241
connect multiplexer, 34
data recording, 28
data replay, 29
define maximum depth, 22
define minimum depth, 22
echogram channel
disconnect, 26
echogram channel
installation, 25, 241
echogram range, 21
echogram settings, 21
EK60 software
installation, 238
frequency channel
installation, 25, 241
initial start-up, 239
investigate low ping rate, 23
noise measurements, 30
power off EK60, 20
power on EK60, 19
raw data recording, 28
raw data replay, 29
set up transceiver
channels, 34
software upgrade, 238
vertical resolution, 22
Procedures
echogram presentations, 21
introduction, 18
power on/off, 19
recall raw data, 28
save raw data, 28
Proprietary telegrams
specifications, 185
Protocol
LAN port, 122
serial port, 120
PSIMDHB
enable telegram format, 130
NMEA sentence, 130
telegram, 190
PSIMP-D
telegram, 188
Pulse duration
description, 233
operational status, 77
Purpose
this manual, 9
R
Range, 125, 150, 152
echogram
how to change, 21
Range selection
description, 235
Raw data
format specifications, 194
how to record, 28
how to replay, 29
save and recall
procedures, 28
249
Simrad EK60
Reader
this manual, 9
Recording
raw data
how to, 28
Reference information, 74
Registered trademarks, 10
Remote IP
LAN port, 121
Remote IP Address, 100,
116, 128, 169
Remote port, 116, 128, 169
LAN port, 121
Remoting
dialog description, 113
Remove
echogram playback files, 79
LAN port, 122
port, 130
serial port, 120
user, 118
Replay
add echogram files, 79
dialog description, 78
files, 79
loop echogram files, 79
raw data
how to, 29
remove echogram files, 79
Resolution
Histogram, 144
vertical
how to change, 22
Resource
serial port, 120
RMC
enable telegram format,
102, 104
NMEA Sentence, 102, 104
telegram, 181
Roll
attitude telegram, 186–187
offset, 173
sensitivity, 173
RS-232
Baudrate, 170
COM port, 169
Data bits, 170
Parity, 170
Rx data
Port Monitor, 171
S
Sailed distance
Calculation Interval, 92
manual setting, 105
Salinity, 111
250
Sample data
EK500 datagram output, 163
Sample interval
operational status, 77
Save EK500
file output, 126
Save HAC
file output, 126
Max(imum) file size, 126
Save Raw Data, 125
Save Settings
dialog description, 94
Scale
echogram (vertical), 147
Scope
view, 59
Scope short-cut menu
options, 71
Seconds
Calculation Interval, 92
Select
data source, 83
Sensitivity
heave, 173
pitch, 173
roll, 173
Sensor Setup
Analog Motion, 172
Sentence
NMEA, 102–103, 105–106
Serial line
Baudrate, 170
COM port, 169
Data bits, 170
Parity, 170
Serial port
Add, 120, 122
Baudrate, 120
colour coding, 119
list, 119
Name, 120
Protocol, 120
Remove, 120
Resource, 120
setup, 121
Serial Port Setup
dialog description, 169
Settings
echogram
how to change, 21
Setup
LAN port, 122
port, 102–103, 105–106,
108, 110, 129
serial port, 121
Shortcut menus
options, 68, 138
Simrad
enable depth telegram, 130
NMEA depth sentence, 130
user, 117
Simrad EK60
familiarization, 11
introduction, 11
Software version, 9
Simrad EM1000
enable telegram format, 108
Simrad EM3000
enable telegram format, 108
Single ping
transmission, 80
Single step
ping, 81
Single Target Detection
dialog description, 141
Single target histogram
view, 57
Single Target Histogram
short-cut menu
options, 69
Single target position
view, 56
Single Target Position
short-cut menu
options, 69
SL (Source level)
description, 231
Slopes on the bottom
description, 227
Software
installation, 238
upgrade, 238
Software version, 9
Sound speed, 111
Sounder / TSS1
enable telegram format, 108
Sounder/TSS1
telegram, 190
Source
distance information, 104
Source level
description, 231
Specification
file formats, 194
Specifications
NMEA telegrams, 177
proprietary telegrams, 185
third party telegrams, 193
Speed
manual input, 104
Speed data, ground
referenced
telegram, 182–183
Speed data, water
referenced
telegram, 182–183
164692/D
Index
Standard
NMEA 0183 standard, 175
Start
pinging, 80
Start -up procedure
initial, 239
Start at vessel distance
file output, 125
Start Relative Bottom, 150
Start-up
procedures, 237
Status Bar
description, 53
function description, 87
Stop
pinging, 80
Stop bit
NMEA 0183 standard, 175
Subnet mask
Ethernet board in
computer, 100, 240
Sunlight
do NOT expose
transducer, 13, 38
Surface
reference, 145
Surface Range
dialog description, 151
EK500 datagram output, 163
Switch off
procedure, 20
Switch on
procedure, 19
System
description, 13
diagram, 14
System installation
basic, 237
T
Talker ID, 103–105, 107, 130
Target audience
this manual, 9
Telegram
biomass, 190
bottom hardness, 190
Course over ground and
Ground speed, 183
DBT, 178
Depth below transducer, 178
Dual ground and water
speed, 182
Dual ground/water
distance, 183
Furuno GPhve, 193
Geographical position
latitude/longitude, 179
164692/D
GGA, 179
GLL, 179
Global positioning
system fix data, 179
GPhve, 193
HDG, 180
HDM, 181
HDT, 181
Heading, deviation and
variation, 180
Heading, magnetic, 181
Heading, true, 181
HFB, 188
PI sensor definition, 188
PSIMDHB, 190
PSIMP-D, 188
Recommended
minimum specific
GNSS data, 181
RMC, 181
Trawl headrope to
footrope and bottom, 188
VBW, 182
VHW, 183
VLW, 183
VTG, 183
Water speed and
heading, 183
Telegram code
ATS, 192
DBS, 177, 188
DPT, 178
EK500 Depth, 185
EM Attitude 1000, 186
EM Attitude 3000, 187
Sounder/TSS1, 190
Telegram formats, 174
about NMEA, 174
NMEA, 177
proprietary, 185
third party, 193
Telegram name
Annotations, 192
Depth, 178
Depth below surface, 177
Depth of trawl below
surface, 188
EK500 Depth, 185
Kongsberg EM Attitude
1000, 186
Kongsberg EM Attitude
3000, 187
Simrad Sounder/TSS1, 190
Telegrams
about, 175
Test
transceiver mode, 77
Text annotation, 112
Third party telegrams
specifications, 193
This manual
purpose, 9
target audience, 9
Tile
function description, 134
Time
Calculation Interval, 92
horizontal axis, 149
Time marker
echogram, 147
Time Varied Gain (TVG)
description, 230
Timed events, 113
Toolbar
Easy operation, 52, 87
location, 52
Normal operation, 52, 87
Toolbars
function description, 86
Tooltip
dialog description, 91
Trademarks, 10
Transceiver
channels
set up, 34
Ethernet address, 98
identification, 130
IP address, 130
Remote IP Address, 100
type, 98
Transceiver identification, 76
Transceiver Installation
dialog description, 96
Transceiver IP address, 76
Transceiver mode
Active, 76
Passive, 76
Test, 77
Transceiver modes, 76
Transducer
depth, 78
frequency, 99
handling, 13, 38
lifting, 13, 38
name, 130
type, 99
Transducer handling, 13, 38
Transducer name, 76
Transducer Parameters
dialog description, 172
Transmit power, 78
Transmitter power
description, 231
Travelled distance
telegram, 183
Trawl
251
Simrad EK60
depth
telegram, 188
dialog description, 109
opening, 110
Trawl (line)
echogram, 146
Trawl, bottom
telegram, 188
Trawl, footrope
telegram, 188
Trawl, headrope
telegram, 188
TVG
description, 230
Tx data
Port Monitor, 171
Type
transceiver, 98
transducer, 99
U
Upgrade
software, 238
Use
basic, 222
User
add, 117
list, 117
remove, 118
rights, 117
User name
data source, 83
log in, 84
User Properties
dialog description, 160
Users and Passwords
dialog description, 117
enable telegram format, 105
NMEA Sentence, 105
telegram, 183
VTG
enable telegram format, 104
NMEA Sentence, 104
telegram, 183
W
White Line
echogram, 146
Window
Colour scale, 60
depth, 55
Echogram, 58
Numerical, 61
Scope, 59
Single target histogram, 57
Single target position, 56
Window menu
options, 67, 132
V
VBW
enable telegram format, 104
NMEA Sentence, 104
telegram, 182
Version
software, 9
Vertical
resolution
how to change, 22
Vessel speed
manual input, 104
VHW
enable telegram format, 107
NMEA Sentence, 107
telegram, 183
View menu
options, 64, 86
VLW
252
164692/D
Simrad EK60
253
164692/D
ISBN-13: 978-8066-011-4
©2012
Kongsberg Maritime AS
Download PDF

advertising